| all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Users Manual-1 | Users Manual | 5.61 MiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
Users Manual-2 | Users Manual | 4.69 MiB | ||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 1.36 MiB | ||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) |
| 1 | Users Manual-1 | Users Manual | 5.61 MiB |
Dahua Network Video Recorder Users Manual V 2.4.3 Table of Contents 1 Features and Specifications ............................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Features ......................................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 2 1.3 NVR100/100-P Series .......................................................................................................... 2 1.3.1 NVR11/11-P Series ............................................................................................................... 4 1.3.2 NVR21-S2/NVR21-P-S2/NVR21-8P-S2 Series ................................................................ 7 1.3.3 NVR11H/11H-P Series ......................................................................................................... 9 1.3.4 NVR11HS Series ................................................................................................................. 11 1.3.5 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 Series .............................................................. 13 1.3.6 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series...................................................................................................... 15 1.3.7 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W Series ...................................................................................... 16 1.3.8 1.3.9 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series ........................................................................................ 18 1.3.10 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series............................................................................... 20 1.3.11 NVR42N Series ................................................................................................................... 21 1.3.12 NVR42/42-P/42-8P Series ................................................................................................. 23 1.3.13 NVR42-16P Series .............................................................................................................. 25 1.3.14 NVR42-4K/42-8P-4K Series .............................................................................................. 27 1.3.15 NVR52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series ........................................................... 29 1.3.16 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series ............................................................................................. 30 1.3.17 NVR44-4K Series ................................................................................................................ 32 1.3.18 NVR54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2 Series .................................................................................. 34 1.3.19 NVR48-4K Series ................................................................................................................ 35 1.3.20 NVR58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series .................................................................................. 37 1.3.21 NVR48/48-16P Series ........................................................................................................ 39 1.3.22 NVR72/72-8P Series ........................................................................................................... 40 1.3.23 NVR74/74-8P/74-16P Series ............................................................................................. 42 1.3.24 NVR78/78-16P/78-RH Series ............................................................................................ 44 1.3.25 NVR70/70-R Series ............................................................................................................. 46 1.3.26 NVR42V-8P Series ............................................................................................................. 48 2 Front Panel and Rear Panel ............................................................................................................. 50 Front Panel .................................................................................................................................. 50 NVR11/11-P/41/41-P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series ...................................... 50 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series .................................................................... 50 NVR11HS Series ................................................................................................................. 51 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series...................................................................................................... 51 NVR41-8P Series ................................................................................................................ 52 NVR42/42-P/42-8P/72/72-8P Series ................................................................................ 53 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series ................. 55 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1 2.1.8 NVR42-16P/42N/42-4K/42-8P-4K/44-4K/48-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2/
54-4KS2/58-4KS2 Series .................................................................................................................. 55 2.1.9 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/74/74-8P/74-16P Series .............................................................. 56 i 2.1.10 NVR48/48-16P/78/78-16P Series ..................................................................................... 58 2.1.11 NVR78-RH Series ............................................................................................................... 60 2.1.12 NVR70/70-R Series ............................................................................................................. 62 2.1.13 NVR42V-8P Series .............................................................................................................. 64 2.2 Rear Panel .................................................................................................................................. 65 NVR100/100-P Series ........................................................................................................ 65 2.2.1 NVR11/11-P Series ............................................................................................................. 66 2.2.2 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W Series ...................................................................................... 67 2.2.3 NVR21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series............................................................................... 69 2.2.4 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series .................................................................... 71 2.2.5 NVR11HS Series ................................................................................................................. 72 2.2.6 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 Series .............................................................. 73 2.2.7 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series ...................................................................................................... 74 2.2.8 2.2.9 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series............................................................................... 75 2.2.10 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P Series ........................................................................... 76 2.2.11 NVR42-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series ................................................ 79 2.2.12 NVR42-8P-4K Series .......................................................................................................... 80 2.2.13 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series ............................................................................................. 82 2.2.14 NVR44-4K/48-4K/54-4KS2/58-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series ................. 84 2.2.15 NVR48/48-16P Series ........................................................................................................ 86 2.2.16 NVR72 Series ...................................................................................................................... 88 2.2.17 NVR72-8P Series ................................................................................................................ 89 2.2.18 NVR74 Series ...................................................................................................................... 91 2.2.19 NVR74-8P/74-16P Series .................................................................................................. 93 2.2.20 NVR78 Series ...................................................................................................................... 95 2.2.21 NVR78-16P Series .............................................................................................................. 97 2.2.22 NVR78-RH Series ............................................................................................................... 99 2.2.23 NVR70 Series .................................................................................................................... 100 2.2.24 NVR70-R Series ................................................................................................................ 102 2.2.25 NVR42V-8P Series ............................................................................................................ 104 Alarm Connection ..................................................................................................................... 106 Alarm Port ........................................................................................................................... 106 Alarm input port ................................................................................................................. 107 Alarm input and output port .............................................................................................. 107 Alarm relay specifications ................................................................................................ 108 Bidirectional talk ....................................................................................................................... 108 Device-end to PC-end ...................................................................................................... 108 PC-end to the device-end ................................................................................................ 109 2.5 Mouse Operation ...................................................................................................................... 109 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.3 2.4 2.6 Remote Control ........................................................................................................................ 110 3 Device Installation ............................................................................................................................ 113 3.1 Check Unpacked NVR ............................................................................................................. 113 3.2 About Front Panel and Rear Panel........................................................................................ 113 3.3 HDD Installation ........................................................................................................................ 113 NVR100/100-P Series ...................................................................................................... 113 3.3.1 ii 4 NVR11/11-P/41/41-P/41-8P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series ........................ 114 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P/11HS/21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/
3.3.2 3.3.3 41HS-W-S2 Series ........................................................................................................................... 115 3.3.4 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/72/72-8P/42-4K/42-8P-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52
-16P-4KS2/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series ............................................................................... 116 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/74/74-8P/74-16P/44-4K/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2 Series ...... 116 3.3.5 3.3.6 NVR48/48-16P/NVR78/78-16P/48-4K/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series ..................... 117 NVR78-RH Series ............................................................................................................. 118 3.3.7 NVR70/70-R Series ........................................................................................................... 119 3.3.8 3.3.9 NVR42V-8P Series ........................................................................................................... 120 3.4 CD-ROM Installation ................................................................................................................ 120 3.5 Connection Sample .................................................................................................................. 122 NVR100/NVR100-P Series .............................................................................................. 122 3.5.1 NVR11/11-P/41/41-P/41-8P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series ........................ 122 3.5.2 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series .................................................................. 123 3.5.3 NVR11HS//41HS-W-S2 Series ....................................................................................... 124 3.5.4 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series.................................................................................................... 125 3.5.5 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 Series ............................................................ 126 3.5.6 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series............................................................................. 127 3.5.7 NVR42N Series ................................................................................................................. 128 3.5.8 3.5.9 NVR42/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series ................. 129 3.5.10 NVR42-4K Series .............................................................................................................. 129 3.5.11 NVR42-8P-4K Series ........................................................................................................ 130 3.5.12 NVR44-4K/48-4K/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series ............... 130 3.5.13 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series ........................................................................................... 131 3.5.14 NVR48/48-16P Series ...................................................................................................... 132 3.5.15 NVR72 Series .................................................................................................................... 133 3.5.16 NVR72-8P Series .............................................................................................................. 133 3.5.17 NVR74 Series .................................................................................................................... 134 3.5.18 NVR74-8P/74-16P Series ................................................................................................ 135 3.5.19 NVR78 Series .................................................................................................................... 136 3.5.20 NVR78-16P Series ............................................................................................................ 137 3.5.21 NVR78-RH Series ............................................................................................................. 138 3.5.22 NVR70 Series .................................................................................................................... 139 3.5.23 NVR70-R Series ................................................................................................................ 140 3.5.24 NVR42V-8P Series ........................................................................................................... 141 Local Basic Operation ..................................................................................................................... 143 Boot up and Shutdown ............................................................................................................ 143 Boot up ................................................................................................................................ 143 Shutdown ............................................................................................................................ 143 4.2 Change/Reset Password ........................................................................................................ 143 Change Password ............................................................................................................. 143 Reset Password ................................................................................................................. 144 4.3 Startup Wizard .......................................................................................................................... 145 4.4 Navigation Bar .......................................................................................................................... 149 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1 iii 4.7 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.4.1 Main Menu .......................................................................................................................... 150 4.4.2 Dual-screen operation ...................................................................................................... 150 4.4.3 Output Screen .................................................................................................................... 150 Tour ...................................................................................................................................... 150 4.4.4 4.4.5 PTZ ...................................................................................................................................... 150 Color .................................................................................................................................... 150 4.4.6 Search ................................................................................................................................. 150 4.4.7 4.4.8 Alarm Status ....................................................................................................................... 150 4.4.9 Channel Info ....................................................................................................................... 151 4.4.10 Registration ........................................................................................................................ 151 4.4.11 Network ............................................................................................................................... 151 4.4.12 HDD Manager .................................................................................................................... 151 4.4.13 USB Manager..................................................................................................................... 151 4.5 Smart Add .................................................................................................................................. 151 4.6 Camera ...................................................................................................................................... 155 Registration ........................................................................................................................ 155 Short-Cut Menu ................................................................................................................. 157 Image .................................................................................................................................. 157 Channel Name ................................................................................................................... 159 Upgrade .............................................................................................................................. 160 UPNP .................................................................................................................................. 160 Built-in Switch Setup ......................................................................................................... 161 Preview ...................................................................................................................................... 161 Preview ............................................................................................................................... 161 Preview control interface .................................................................................................. 162 Right Click Menu ............................................................................................................... 163 Preview Display Effect Setup .......................................................................................... 164 Video Color ................................................................................................................ 164 Display ....................................................................................................................... 166 TV adjust .................................................................................................................... 167 Preview Tour Parameters ................................................................................................ 167 Fish eye (Optional) ................................................................................................................... 168 Fish eye de-warp during preview interface .................................................................... 168 Fish eye de-warp during playback .................................................................................. 171 PTZ ............................................................................................................................................. 171 PTZ Settings....................................................................................................................... 171 PTZ Control ........................................................................................................................ 172 PTZ Function Setup ................................................................................................. 174 Call PTZ Function ..................................................................................................... 177 4.10 Record and Snapshot .............................................................................................................. 178 4.10.1 Encode ................................................................................................................................ 178 4.10.1.1 Encode ....................................................................................................................... 178 4.10.1.2 Overlay ....................................................................................................................... 179 4.10.1.3 Snapshot .................................................................................................................... 180 4.10.2 Schedule ............................................................................................................................. 181 4.10.2.1 Schedule Record ...................................................................................................... 181 4.7.4.1 4.7.4.2 4.7.4.3 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.9.2.1 4.9.2.2 4.8.1 4.8.2 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.7.5 4.8 4.9 iv 4.10.2.2 Schedule Snapshot .................................................................................................. 184 4.10.3 Motion detect record/snapshot ........................................................................................ 186 4.10.3.1 Motion detect record ................................................................................................ 186 4.10.3.2 Motion Detect Snapshot .......................................................................................... 188 4.10.4 Alarm Record/Snapshot ................................................................................................... 189 4.10.4.1 Alarm Record ............................................................................................................ 189 4.10.4.2 Alarm Snapshot ........................................................................................................ 190 4.10.5 Manual Record/Snapshot ................................................................................................. 191 4.10.5.1 Manual Record ......................................................................................................... 191 4.10.5.2 Manual Snapshot...................................................................................................... 192 4.10.6 Holiday Record/Snapshot ................................................................................................ 192 4.10.6.1 Holiday Record ......................................................................................................... 192 4.10.6.2 Holiday Snapshot ..................................................................................................... 194 4.10.7 Other Record/Snapshot .................................................................................................... 194 4.11 Playback and Search ............................................................................................................... 194 4.11.1 Real-time Playback ........................................................................................................... 194 4.11.2 Search Interface ................................................................................................................ 194 4.11.2.1 Smart Search ............................................................................................................ 199 4.11.2.2 Accurate playback by time ...................................................................................... 199 4.11.2.3 Mark Playback .......................................................................................................... 200 4.11.3 Picture Playback ................................................................................................................ 201 4.12 Backup ....................................................................................................................................... 202 4.12.1 File Backup ......................................................................................................................... 202 4.12.2 Import/Export ...................................................................................................................... 203 4.12.3 Backup Log......................................................................................................................... 204 4.12.4 USB Device Auto Pop-up ................................................................................................. 205 4.13 Alarm .......................................................................................................................................... 206 4.13.1 Detect Alarm....................................................................................................................... 206 4.13.1.1 Motion Detect ............................................................................................................ 206 4.13.1.2 Tampering .................................................................................................................. 210 4.13.1.3 Video Loss ................................................................................................................. 211 IVS (Optional)..................................................................................................................... 212 4.13.2.1 Tripwire Optional .............................................................................................. 212 Intrusion (Cross warning zone) Optional...................................................... 216 4.13.2.2 4.13.2.3 Object Detect Optional .................................................................................... 218 4.13.2.4 Scene Change Optional ................................................................................. 219 4.13.3 Face Detect (Optional)...................................................................................................... 220 4.13.4 Audio Detect (Optional) .................................................................................................... 220 4.13.5 Alarm output ....................................................................................................................... 221 4.13.6 Alarm Setup ........................................................................................................................ 222 4.13.7 Abnormality......................................................................................................................... 227 4.14 Network ...................................................................................................................................... 229 4.14.1.1 TCP/IP ........................................................................................................................ 229 4.14.1.2 Connection ................................................................................................................ 231 4.14.1.3 WIFI AP ...................................................................................................................... 232 4.14.1.3.1 WIFI AP .................................................................................................................. 232 4.13.2 v 4.14.1.3.2 Advanced ................................................................................................................ 233 4.14.1.4 WIFI ............................................................................................................................ 234 4.14.1.5 3G ............................................................................................................................... 235 4.14.1.6 PPPoE ........................................................................................................................ 236 4.14.1.7 DDNS ......................................................................................................................... 237 4.14.1.8 UPnP .......................................................................................................................... 239 4.14.1.9 IP Filter ....................................................................................................................... 240 4.14.1.10 Email .......................................................................................................................... 242 4.14.1.11 FTP ............................................................................................................................. 243 4.14.1.12 SNMP ........................................................................................................................ 245 4.14.1.13 Multicast .................................................................................................................... 245 4.14.1.14 Alarm Centre ............................................................................................................ 247 4.14.1.15 Auto register ............................................................................................................. 247 4.14.1.16 P2P ............................................................................................................................ 248 4.14.1.17 Easy Space ............................................................................................................... 250 4.14.1.18 SWITCH .................................................................................................................... 251 4.14.2 Network Test ....................................................................................................................... 251 4.14.2.1 Network Test.............................................................................................................. 251 4.14.2.2 Network Load ............................................................................................................ 252 4.15 HDD Setup ................................................................................................................................ 253 4.15.1 Format ................................................................................................................................. 253 4.15.2 HDD Information ................................................................................................................ 254 4.15.3 Advanced ............................................................................................................................ 256 4.15.4 HDD Detect ........................................................................................................................ 258 4.15.4.1 Manual Detect ........................................................................................................... 259 4.15.4.2 Detect Report ............................................................................................................ 259 4.15.5 RAID Manager ................................................................................................................... 261 4.15.5.1 RAID Config .............................................................................................................. 261 4.15.5.2 Hotspare disks .......................................................................................................... 262 4.16 Basic Setups ............................................................................................................................. 263 4.16.1 Device Setup ...................................................................................................................... 263 4.16.2 Data and Time ................................................................................................................... 264 4.16.3 Holiday ................................................................................................................................ 265 4.17 Device Maintenance and Manager ........................................................................................ 265 4.17.1 System Info......................................................................................................................... 265 4.17.1.1 Version ....................................................................................................................... 265 4.17.1.2 BPS ............................................................................................................................ 266 4.17.1.3 Online User ............................................................................................................... 266 4.17.1.4 Remote Device Information .................................................................................... 267 4.17.1.5 Remote....................................................................................................................... 268 4.17.1.5.1 Device Status........................................................................................................... 268 4.17.1.5.2 Firmware ................................................................................................................. 269 4.17.2 Log ....................................................................................................................................... 270 4.17.3 Voice .................................................................................................................................... 271 4.17.3.1.1 File Manage ............................................................................................................ 271 4.17.3.1.2 Schedule .................................................................................................................. 272 vi 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.5.1 5.5.2 4.17.4 Account ............................................................................................................................... 272 4.17.4.1.1 Add User ................................................................................................................. 274 4.17.4.1.2 Modify user ............................................................................................................. 276 4.17.4.1.3 Change Password .................................................................................................... 276 4.17.4.1.4 Add/Modify Group ................................................................................................. 276 4.17.4.1.5 Security Question .................................................................................................... 278 4.17.5 Update ................................................................................................................................. 278 Local Update ............................................................................................................. 278 4.17.5.1 4.17.5.2 Uboot .......................................................................................................................... 279 4.17.6 Default ................................................................................................................................. 279 4.17.7 RS232 ................................................................................................................................. 280 4.17.8 Auto Maintain ..................................................................................................................... 281 4.17.9 Logout /Shutdown/Restart ................................................................................................ 282 5 Web Operation .................................................................................................................................. 283 5.1 General Introduction ................................................................................................................ 283 Preparation ......................................................................................................................... 283 Log in ................................................................................................................................... 284 5.2 LAN Mode .................................................................................................................................. 285 5.3 Real-time Monitor ..................................................................................................................... 287 PTZ ............................................................................................................................................. 288 5.4 5.5 Image/Alarm-out ....................................................................................................................... 290 Image .................................................................................................................................. 290 Alarm output ....................................................................................................................... 290 Zero-channel Encode .............................................................................................................. 290 5.6 5.7 WAN Login ................................................................................................................................ 291 Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 292 5.8 Camera ............................................................................................................................... 292 Registration ............................................................................................................... 292 Image ......................................................................................................................... 294 Encode ....................................................................................................................... 297 5.8.1.3.1 Encode....................................................................................................................... 297 5.8.1.3.2 Snapshot .................................................................................................................... 298 5.8.1.3.3 Video Overlay ........................................................................................................... 299 5.8.1.3.4 Path ........................................................................................................................... 299 Channel Name .......................................................................................................... 300 IPC Upgrade ............................................................................................................. 300 Network ............................................................................................................................... 301 TCP/IP ........................................................................................................................ 301 5.8.2.1 5.8.2.2 Connection ................................................................................................................ 302 5.8.2.3 WIFI AP ...................................................................................................................... 303 5.8.2.3.1 General Setup ............................................................................................................ 303 5.8.2.3.2 Advanced .................................................................................................................. 303 5.8.2.4 WIFI ............................................................................................................................ 304 3G ............................................................................................................................... 305 5.8.2.5 5.8.2.5.1 CDMA/GPRS ........................................................................................................... 305 5.8.2.5.2 Mobile ....................................................................................................................... 306 5.8.1.1 5.8.1.2 5.8.1.3 5.8.1.4 5.8.1.5 5.8.1 5.8.2 vii 5.8.3.1 5.8.3.2 PPPoE ........................................................................................................................ 307 5.8.2.6 DDNS ......................................................................................................................... 307 5.8.2.7 IP filter ........................................................................................................................ 308 5.8.2.8 5.8.2.9 Email .......................................................................................................................... 309 5.8.2.10 UPnP .......................................................................................................................... 310 5.8.2.11 SNMP ......................................................................................................................... 311 5.8.2.12 Multicast ..................................................................................................................... 312 5.8.2.13 Auto Register ............................................................................................................ 313 5.8.2.14 Alarm Centre ............................................................................................................. 313 5.8.2.15 HTTPS ....................................................................................................................... 314 5.8.2.15.1 Create Server Certificate ......................................................................................... 314 5.8.2.15.2 Download root certificate ........................................................................................ 315 5.8.2.15.3 View and set HTTPS port ....................................................................................... 318 5.8.2.15.4 Login ....................................................................................................................... 318 5.8.2.16 P2P ............................................................................................................................. 318 Event ................................................................................................................................... 319 Video detect .............................................................................................................. 319 5.8.3.1.1 Motion Detect ........................................................................................................... 319 5.8.3.1.2 Video Loss ................................................................................................................ 323 5.8.3.1.3 Tampering ................................................................................................................. 324 IVS (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 324 5.8.3.2.1 Tripwire ..................................................................................................................... 324 5.8.3.2.2 Intrusion (Cross warning zone) ................................................................................. 326 5.8.3.2.3 Object Detect ............................................................................................................ 328 5.8.3.2.4 Change Scene ............................................................................................................ 329 Face Detect (Optional) ............................................................................................ 330 Audio Detect (Optional) ........................................................................................... 331 Alarm .......................................................................................................................... 331 5.8.3.5.1 Local Alarm .............................................................................................................. 331 5.8.3.5.2 Net Alarm .................................................................................................................. 334 5.8.3.5.3 IPC external alarm .................................................................................................... 334 IPC Offline Alarm ..................................................................................................... 335 5.8.3.5.4 Abnormality ............................................................................................................... 336 Storage ................................................................................................................................ 338 Schedule .................................................................................................................... 338 HDD Manager ........................................................................................................... 340 5.8.4.2.1 Local Storage ............................................................................................................ 340 5.8.4.2.2 HDD .......................................................................................................................... 340 5.8.4.2.3 FTP ............................................................................................................................ 340 Record Control .......................................................................................................... 341 RAID Manager .......................................................................................................... 342 5.8.4.4.1 RAID Config ............................................................................................................. 342 5.8.4.4.2 Hotspare disks ........................................................................................................... 342 Storage ....................................................................................................................... 343 5.8.4.5.1 Main Stream .............................................................................................................. 343 5.8.4.5.2 Sub Stream ................................................................................................................ 343 5.8.3.3 5.8.3.4 5.8.3.5 5.8.4.1 5.8.4.2 5.8.4.3 5.8.4.4 5.8.3.6 5.8.4.5 5.8.3 5.8.4 viii 5.9 5.8.5 5.8.5.3 5.8.5.2 5.8.5.1 5.8.4.5.3 Snapshot .................................................................................................................... 344 Setting ................................................................................................................................. 344 General ...................................................................................................................... 344 5.8.5.1.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 344 5.8.5.1.2 Date and time ............................................................................................................ 345 5.8.5.1.3 Holiday Setup ............................................................................................................ 346 Account ...................................................................................................................... 346 5.8.5.2.1 User name ................................................................................................................. 347 5.8.5.2.2 Group ........................................................................................................................ 348 Display ....................................................................................................................... 350 5.8.5.3.1 Display ...................................................................................................................... 350 5.8.5.3.2 Tour ........................................................................................................................... 351 5.8.5.4 Alarm Out................................................................................................................... 351 5.8.5.5 Default ........................................................................................................................ 352 5.8.5.6 Import/Export ............................................................................................................. 352 5.8.5.7 Auto maintain ............................................................................................................ 353 5.8.5.8 Upgrade ..................................................................................................................... 353 5.8.5.9 RS232 ........................................................................................................................ 354 5.8.5.10 PTZ ............................................................................................................................. 354 Information ................................................................................................................................ 356 Version ................................................................................................................................ 356 5.9.1 5.9.2 Log ....................................................................................................................................... 356 5.9.3 Online User......................................................................................................................... 357 5.10 Playback .................................................................................................................................... 357 5.10.1 Search Record ................................................................................................................... 358 5.10.2 File List ................................................................................................................................ 358 5.10.3 Playback ............................................................................................................................. 359 5.10.4 Download ............................................................................................................................ 360 5.10.5 Load more........................................................................................................................... 360 5.10.5.1 Download By File ..................................................................................................... 360 5.10.5.2 Download by Time .................................................................................................... 361 5.10.5.3 Watermark ................................................................................................................. 362 5.11 Alarm .......................................................................................................................................... 362 5.12 Log out ....................................................................................................................................... 363 5.13 Un-install Web Control ............................................................................................................. 364 6 Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 365 7 FAQ .................................................................................................................................................... 366 8 Appendix A HDD Capacity Calculation ......................................................................................... 371 9 Appendix B Compatible Network Camera List............................................................................. 372 ix Welcome Thank you for purchasing our network video recorder!
This users manual is designed to be a reference tool for your system. Please open the accessory bag to check the items one by one in accordance with the list below. Contact your local retailer ASAP if something is missing or damaged in the bag. x Important Safeguards and Warnings 1Electrical safety All installation and operation here should conform to your local electrical safety codes. The product must be grounded to reduce the risk of electric shock. We assume no liability or responsibility for all the fires or electric shock caused by improper handling or installation. 2Transportation security Heavy stress, violent vibration or water splash are not allowed during transportation, storage and installation. 3Installation Keep upwards. Handle with care. Do not apply power to the NVR before completing installation. Do not place objects on the NVR. 4Qualified engineers needed All the examination and repair work should be done by the qualified service engineers. We are not liable for any problems caused by unauthorized modifications or attempted repair. 5Environment The NVR should be installed in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, inflammable, explosive substances and etc. This series product shall be transported, storage and used in the specified environments. Environment which needs to comply with the following conditions:
The function of the ITE being investigated to IEC 60950-1 is considered not likely to require connection to an Ethernet network with outside plant routing, including campus environment. The installation instructions clearly state that the ITE is to be connected only to PoE networks without routing to the outside plant. 6. Accessories Be sure to use all the accessories recommended by manufacturer. Before installation, please open the package and check all the components are included. Contact your local retailer ASAP if something is broken in your package. 7. Lithium battery Improper battery use may result in fire, explosion, or personal injury!
When replace the battery, please make sure you are using the same model!
CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Before your operation please read the following instructions carefully. Installation environment xi Keep away from extreme hot places and sources Avoid direct sunlight Keep away from extreme humid places Avoid violent vibration Do not put other devices on the top of the NVR Be installed in well ventilated place; do not block the vent. Accessories Check the following accessories after opening the box Please refer to the packing list in the box *
Standards Approvals For our Wi-Fi series product such as NVR41HS-W-S2, please refer to the following important notices. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. RF exposure warning This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least xii 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9. xiii 1 Features and Specifications 1.1 Overview This series NVR is a high performance network video recorder. This series product support local preview, multiple-window display, recorded file local storage, remote control and mouse shortcut menu operation, and remote management and control function. This series product supports centre storage, front-end storage and client-end storage. The monitor zone in the front-end can be set in anywhere. Working with other front-end devices such as IPC, NVS, this series product can establish a strong surveillance network via the CMS. In the network system, there is only one network cable from the monitor centre to the monitor zone in the whole network. There is no audio/video cable from the monitor centre to the monitor zone. The whole project is featuring of simple connection, low-cost, low maintenance work. This series NVR can be widely used in many areas such as public security, water conservancy, transportation and education. 1.2 Features Real-time Surveillance VGA, HDMI port. Connect to monitor to realize real-time surveillance. Some series support TV/VGA/HDMI output at the same time. Short-cut menu when preview. Support popular PTZ decoder control protocols. Support preset, tour and pattern. Support each channel real-time record independently, and at the same time it can support search, forward play, network monitor, record search, download and etc. Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play. Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time Support specified zone enlargement. Each group has different management powers that can be edited freely. Every user belongs to an exclusive group. Via corresponding setup (such as alarm setup and schedule setup), you can backup related audio/video data in the network video recorder. Support Web record and record local video and storage the file in the client end. Respond to external alarm simultaneously (within 200MS), based on users pre-defined relay setup, system can process the alarm input correctly and prompt user by screen and voice (support pre-recorded audio). Support central alarm server setup, so that alarm information can remotely notify user automatically. Alarm input can be derived from various connected peripheral devices. Alert you via email/sms. 1 Playback User Management Storage Alarm Network Monitor Through network, sending audio/video data compressed by IPC or NVS to client-ends, then the data will be decompressed and display. Support max 128 connections at the same time. Transmit audio/video data by HTTP, TCP, UDP, MULTICAST, RTP/RTCP and etc. Transmit some alarm data or alarm info by SNMP. Support WEB access in WAN/LAN. Window Split windows in one monitor. Support 1/4/8/9/16/ 25/36-window display when Adopt the video compression and digital process to show several preview and 1/4/9/16-window display when playback. Support normal/motion detect/alarm record function. Save the recorded files in the HDD, USB device, client-end PC, or network storage server. You can search or playback the saved files at the local-end or via the Web/USB device. Support network backup, USB2.0 record backup function, the recorded files can be saved in network storage server, peripheral USB2.0 device, burner and etc. Supervise NVR configuration and control power via Ethernet. Support management via WEB. Support peripheral equipment management such as protocol setup and port connection. Support transparent data transmission such as RS232 (RS-422), RS485
(RS-485). Support switch between NTSC and PAL. Support real-time system resources information and running statistics display. Support log file. Local GUI output. Shortcut menu operation via mouse. IR control function (For some series product only.). Shortcut menu operation via remote control. Support IPC or NVS remote video preview and control. Record Backup Network Management Peripheral Equipment Management Auxiliary 1.3 Specifications 1.3.1 NVR100/100-P Series Model 100 Series 100-P Series System System Resources 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total bandwidth supports 28/56Mbps respectively. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264/MJPEG 2 Model Type Decode Capability 100 Series 100-P Series Max 2-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch 720P 30fps or 8-ch D1 30fps Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input N/A N/A Audio Output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in 2.5-inch SATA port Multiple-Chann Max 8-channel D1 or 4-channel 720P or 2-channel 1080P playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port N/A Indicator RS485 Port N/A USB Port 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 3 Model Network Connection PoE Power Port 100 Series 100-P Series 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 1 power socket. Power adapter 1 power socket. Power adapter power supplying mode. DC 5V power supplying mode. DC 48V 2A power. 1.25A power. Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver Window Clock N/A N/A N/A Built-in clock. Indicator Light N/A General Power Consumption 10W (No HDD) Working Temperature Working Humidity Air pressure Dimension Weight 1055 1090 86kPa106kPa 191.8mm128.2mm35.8mm 0.32kg0.36kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.2 NVR11/11-P Series Model 11 Series 11-P Series 4 Model System System Resources 11 Series 11-P Series 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total bandwidth supports 28/56Mbps respectively. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264/MJPEG Type Decode Capability Max 2-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch 720P 30fps or 8-ch D1 30fps Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port 5 Model 11 Series 11-P Series Multiple-Chann Max 8-channel D1 or 4-channel 720P or 2-channel 1080P playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port N/A Indicator RS485 Port N/A 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 USB Port Network Connection PoE Power Port 1 power socket. Power adapter 1 power socket. Power adapter power supplying mode. DC 12V power supplying mode. DC 48V power. power. Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver Window Clock N/A N/A N/A Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power Consumption 10W (No HDD) Working Temperature Working Humidity Air pressure 1055 1090 86kPa106kPa 6 Model 11 Series 11-P Series Dimension Weight 205mm206.75mm45.2mm 0.5kg1kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.3 NVR21-S2/NVR21-P-S2/NVR21-8P-S2 Series Model 21-S2 Series 21-P-S2 Series 21-8P-S2 Series 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total System System Resources bandwidth supports 80Mbps. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264 Type Decode Capability Max 4-ch 1080P 30fps or 8-ch 720P 30fps or 8-ch D1 30fps Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output 7 Model 21-S2 Series 21-P-S2 Series 21-8P-S2 Series Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port Multiple-Chann Max 8-channel D1 or 8-channel 720P or 4-channel 1080P playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port N/A Indicator RS485 Port N/A 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 8 USB Port Network Connection PoE Power Port 1 power socket. 1 power socket. 1 power socket. Power power adapter Power adapter Power adapter supplying power supplying power supplying mode. DC 12V mode. DC 48V mode. DC 48V power. power. power. Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver Window N/A N/A N/A 8 Model 21-S2 Series 21-P-S2 Series 21-8P-S2 Series Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power Consumption 10W (No HDD) Working Temperature Working Humidity Air pressure 1055 1090 86kPa106kPa Dimension 205mm206.75mm 205mm206.75mm 425mm95mm260 45.2mm 45.2mm mm Weight 0.5kg2kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.4 NVR11H/11H-P Series Model 11H Series 11H-P Series System System Resources 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total bandwidth supports 28/56Mbps respectively. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264/MJPEG Type Decode Capability Max 2-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch 720P 30fps or 8-ch D1 30fps 9 Model 11H Series 11H-P Series Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port Multiple-Chann Max 8-channel D1 or 4-channel 720P or 2-channel 1080P playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port N/A Indicator RS485 Port N/A USB Port Network Connection PoE 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 10 Model Power Port 11H Series 11H-P Series 1 power socket. Power adapter 1 power socket. Power adapter power supplying mode. DC 12V power supplying mode. DC 48V power. power. Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver Window Clock N/A N/A N/A Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power Consumption 10W (No HDD) Working Temperature Working Humidity Air pressure Dimension Weight 1055 1090 86kPa106kPa 325mm250.58mm51mm 0.5kg1kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.5 NVR11HS Series Model 11HS Series System System 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total Resources bandwidth supports 25/56Mbps respectively. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system 11 Model 11HS Series WEB/Local GUI Operation Interface Decode Video Decode H.264 Type Decode Capability For 8-channel series product: Max 2-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch 720P 30fs or 8-ch D1 30fps. For 4-channel series product: Max 1-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch 720P 30fs or 4-ch D1 30fps. Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input Audio Output N/A N/A Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port Multiple-Chann For 8-channel series product: Max 2-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch el Playback 720P 30fs or 8-channel D1 30fs playback. For 4-channel series product: Max 1-ch 1080P 30fps or 4-ch 720P 30fs or 4-ch D1 30fs playback. Port and RS232 Port Indicator RS485 Port USB Port Network Connection PoE Port Power Port N/A N/A 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. One at the front panel and one at the rear panel. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 1 power socket. Power adapter power supplying mode. DC 12V/1.5A power. Power Button N/A 12 Model 11HS Series Power On-off N/A Button IR Receiver N/A Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power 10W (No HDD) Consumption Working Temperature Working Humidity 1055 1090 Air pressure 86kPa106kPa Dimension(W*
260mm220mm44mm D*H) Weight 0.7kg0.8kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.6 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 Series Model NVR21HS-S2 NVR21HS-P-S2 NVR21HS-8P-S2 Series Series Series System System 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total Resources bandwidth supports 80Mbps. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264 Type Decode Capability Max 4-ch 1080P 30fps or 8-ch 720P 30fs or 8-ch D1 30fps Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 13 Model NVR21HS-S2 NVR21HS-P-S2 NVR21HS-8P-S2 Series Series Series Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port Multiple-Chann Max 4-channel 1080P or 8-channel 720P or 8-channel D1 playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port Indicator RS485 Port USB Port Network Connection PoE Port N/A N/A 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 8 Power Port 1 power socket. 1 power socket. 1 power socket. Power power adapter Power adapter Power adapter supplying power supplying power supplying mode. DC 12V mode. DC 48V mode. DC 48V power. power. power. Power Button Power On-off Button N/A N/A IR Receiver N/A Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power 10W (No HDD) Consumption 14 Model NVR21HS-S2 NVR21HS-P-S2 NVR21HS-8P-S2 Series Series Series Working Temperature Working Humidity 1055 1090 Air pressure 86kPa106kPa Dimension(W 260mm220mm44mm DH) Weight 0.7kg0.8kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.7 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series Model 41HS-W-S2 Series System System 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total Resources bandwidth supports 80Mbps. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Type Decode Capability Max 8-ch 1080P or 4-ch 3M or 2-ch 5M. Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8/9-window Audio Audio Input Audio Output N/A N/A Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port 15 Model 41HS-W-S2 Series Multiple-Chann Max 8-ch 1080P playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port Indicator RS485 Port USB Port Network Connection PoE Port Power Port N/A N/A 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. One at the front panel and one at the rear panel. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 1 power socket. Power adapter power supplying mode. DC 12V/2A power. N/A N/A Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver N/A Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power 30W (No HDD) Consumption Working Temperature Working Humidity 1055 1090 Air pressure 86kPa106kPa Dimension(W*
375mm287mm52mm D*H) Weight 1.5kg2.5kg(No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.8 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W Series Model 41 Series 41-P Series 41-8P Series 41-W Series System System Resources 4/8/16-ch series product support 4/8/16 HD connection respectively. Total bandwidth supports 28/56/80Mbps respectively. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system 16 Model 41 Series 41-P Series 41-8P Series 41-W Series Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264/MJPEG/MJPEG4 Type Decode Max 2-ch 5M 25fps or 4-ch 3M 25fps or 4-ch 1080P 30fps Capability or 8-ch 720P 30fs Video Video Input 4/8/16-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8/9/16-window 1/4-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port Multiple-Chann Max 4-channel 1080P playback el Playback WIFI AP Port and RS232 Port Indicator RS485 Port USB Port Network Connection PoE Port Power Port N/A N/A N/A Yes 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 8 N/A 1 power 1 power socket. Power adapter 1 power socket. Power power supplying mode. DC 48V socket. Power adapter power power. supplying mode. DC 12V power. adapter power supplying mode. DC 12V power. 17 Model 41 Series 41-P Series 41-8P Series 41-W Series Power Button 1 button Power On-off N/A Button IR Receiver N/A Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power 10W (No HDD) Consumption Working Temperature Working Humidity 1055 1090 Air pressure 86kPa106kPa Dimension 205mm206.75mm45.2mm 270mm204m 205mm206.7 m42mm 5mm45.2mm Weight 0.5kg1kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.9 NVR41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series Model 41H Series 41H-P Series 41H-8P Series System System 4/8/16-ch series product support 4/8/16 HD connection respectively. Resources Total bandwidth supports 28/56/80Mbps respectively. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264/MJPEG/MJPEG4 Type Decode Max 2-ch 5M 25fps or 4-ch 3M 25fps or 4-ch 1080P 30fps Capability or 8-ch 720P 30fs Video Video Input 4/8/16-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 18 Model 41H Series 41H-P Series 41H-8P Series Window Split 1/4/8/9/16-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 1 built-in SATA port Multiple-Chann Max 4-channel 1080P playback el Playback Port and RS232 Port N/A Indicator RS485 Port N/A 2-channel 2-channel USB Port Network Connection 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. PoE Port N/A 4 8 Power Port 1 power socket. 1 power socket. Power adapter power Power power adapter supplying mode. DC 48V power. supplying mode. DC 12V power. Power Button 1 button Power On-off N/A Button IR Receiver N/A Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power 10W (No HDD) Consumption Working Temperature 1055 19 Model 41H Series 41H-P Series 41H-8P Series Working Humidity 1090 Air pressure 86kPa106kPa Dimension 325mm250.58mm51mm Weight 0.5kg1kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.10 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series Model NVR22-S2 Series NVR22-P-S2 Series NVR22-8P-S2 Series System System 4/8-ch series product support 4/8 HD connection respectively. Total Resources bandwidth supports 80Mbps. OS Embedded Linux real-time operation system Operation Interface WEB/Local GUI Decode Video Decode H.264 Type Decode Capability Max 4-ch 1080P 30fps or 8-ch 720P 30fs or 8-ch D1 30fps Video Video Input 4/8-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Standard Alarm Alarm Input N/A Alarm Output N/A Funciton Storage 2 built-in SATA ports Multiple-Chann Max 4-channel 1080P or 8-channel 720P or 8-channel D1 playback el Playback 20 Model Port and RS232 Port Indicator RS485 Port USB Port Network Connection PoE Port NVR22-S2 Series NVR22-P-S2 Series NVR22-8P-S2 Series N/A N/A 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. N/A 4 8 Power Port 1 power socket. 1 power socket. 1 power socket. Power power adapter Power adapter Power adapter supplying power supplying power supplying mode. DC 12V mode. DC 48V mode. DC 48V power. power. power. Power Button Power On-off Button N/A N/A IR Receiver N/A Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. General Power 10W (No HDD) Consumption Working Temperature Working Humidity 1055 1090 Air pressure 86kPa106kPa Dimension(W 375mm287mm52mm DH) Weight 1.5kg2.5kg (No HDD) Installation Desk installation Mode 1.3.11 NVR42N Series Model 42N Series 21 System System 4/8/16/32-channel series product support 4/8/16/32-channel HD connection Resource respectively. Main stream bandwidth supports 40/80/160/160Mbps s respectively. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Compres sion Decode Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, or 4-channel 1080P, or Capacity 4*3M or 2*5M decode. Video Audio Alarm Video Input Video Output HDMI 4/8/16/32-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16-window Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a N/A N/A Function Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. Multiple-c Max 8-channel 720P/4-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 Three peripheral USB2.0 ports. Port Network 1 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on 22 Power Port Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver Window One power port, power adapter. Input DC 12V. One button. At the rear panel. One button. At the front-panel. Support IR remote control Clock Built-in clock. Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. General Power One HDD status indicator light. 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 375mm287mm52mm n Weight 1.5kg2.5kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.12 NVR42/42-P/42-8P Series Model 42 Series 42-P Series 42-8P Series System System 4/8/16/32-channel series product support 4/8/16/32-channel HD connection Resource respectively. Main stream bandwidth supports 40/80/160/160Mbps s respectively. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Compres sion 23 Video Audio Alarm Decode Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, or 4-channel 1080P, or Capacity 4*3M or 2*5M decode. Video Input Video Output HDMI 4/8/16/32-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16-window Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 4-ch alarm input 2-ch alarm output Function Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. Multiple-c Max 8-channel 720P/4-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 Three peripheral USB2.0 ports. Port Network 1 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on Power Port Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver One power port, Two power ports. Input One power adapter. Input DC 12V/DC 48V. Input power ports. 100-240V DC 12V. One button. At the rear panel. 47~63Hz. One button. At the front-panel. Support IR remote control 24 Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. General Power One HDD status indicator light. 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 375mm287mm52m 375mm287mm52mm 295mm275mm47m n Weight m 1.5kg2.5kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation m n 1.3.13 NVR42-16P Series Model 42-16P Series System System 16/32-channel series product support 4/8/16/32-channel HD connection Resource respectively. Main stream/sub stream bandwidth supports 200Mbps. s Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Compres sion Decode Max supports 32-channel D1, or 16-channel 720P, or 8-channel 1080P, or Capacity 4*3M or 2*5M decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 4/8/16/32-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16-window Split 25 Audio Alarm Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 4-ch alarm input 2-ch alarm output Function Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. Multiple-c Max 16-channel 720P/8-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 One peripheral USB2.0 port. Port One peripheral USB3.0 port. Network 1 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on Power Port Power Button Power On-off Button IR Receiver Window One power ports. Input 100-240V47~63Hz. One button. At the rear panel. N/A N/A Clock Built-in clock. Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. General Power One HDD status indicator light. 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat 26 ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 375mm287mm52mm n Weight 1.5kg2.5kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.14 NVR42-4K/42-8P-4K Series Model NVR42-4K Series NVR42-8P-4K Series System 8/16/32-channel series product support 8/16/32-channel HD connection System Resource respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports 48/96/192Mbps. s Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Decode Compres sion Decode H.264: Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, 4-channel 1080P Capacity or 1-channel 4K decode. H.265: Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, 4-channel 1080P Video Video Input Video Output HDMI or 1-channel 4K decode. 8/16/32-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16-window Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Audio Alarm 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a, G.711u, PCM, G726 8-ch alarm input 3-ch alarm output 27 Output Relay output. Relay DC 30V /1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. Multiple-c Max 8-channel 720P/4-channel 1080P/1-channel 4K playback at the same hannel time. Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB Port 2 peripheral USB ports: One USB2.0 at the front panel and one USB3.0 at the rear panel. Network One RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on Power Port One power socket. Power adapter power supplying. Input DC 12V One power port. Input 100-240V 47~63Hz. power. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button N/A IR N/A Receiver Window Clock Built-in clock. General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. One device running status indicator light. 20W(No HDD) Power Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 1U, 375mm(W) 49.8mm(H) 250mm(D) n Weight 1.65kgNo HDD 28 Installatio Desk/rack installation n 1.3.15 NVR52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series Model NVR52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series System 8/16/32/64-channel series product support 8/16/32/64-channel HD System Resource connection respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports s 80/160/320/320Mbps. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Decode Interface Video Compres sion MPEG4MJPGH.264H.265 Decode H.264/H.265: Max supports 64-channel D1, or 32-channel 720P, Capacity 16-channel 1080P or 4-channel 4K decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16/25/36-window Audio Alarm Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a, G.711u, PCM, G726 (The bidirectional talk function supports Compres G.711a, G.711u, PCM only.) sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 4-ch alarm input 3-ch relay output Function Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. Multiple-c Max 64-channel D1/32-channel 720P/16-channel 1080P/4-channel 4K hannel playback at the same time. Playback Record Mode Backup Mode Overwrite Flash disk, DVD burner. 29 Port and Network IPv4/IPv6/HTTP/UPnP/NTP/SADP/SNMP/PPPoE/DNS/FTP/ONVIF(Versio Indicator Protocol n 2.4)/PSIA RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB Port 2 peripheral USB ports: One USB2.0 at the front panel and one USB3.0 at the rear panel. Network One RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on Power Port Power Button Power On-off Button One power socket. Power adapter power supplying. Input DC 12V-4A power. One button. At the rear panel. N/A IR N/A Receiver Window General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. One device running status indicator light. Power DC 12V Power General series: 9.5W(No HDD) Consump 8 PoE series: 15.2W(No HDD) 16 PoE series: 14.5W(No HDD)
-10+55 tion Working Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio General series: 375mm(W) 56mm(H) 281.4mm(D) n PoE series: 375mm(W) 53mm(H) 327.3mm(D) Weight
(No HDD General series: : 1.60Kg 8 PoE series: 2.60Kg 16 PoE series: 2.70Kg Installatio Desk/rack installation n 1.3.16 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series 30 Model NVR44 Series NVR44-8P Series NVR44-16P Series System System 8/16/32-channel series product support 8/16/32-channel HD connection Resource respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports 200Mbps. s Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Compres sion Decode Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, or 4-channel 3M or 2*5M Capacity decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16-window Audio Alarm Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 16-ch alarm input 4-ch alarm output Relay output. Relay DC 30V /1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 4 built-in SATA ports. 1 external eSATA port. Multiple-c Max 8-channel 720P/4-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. One at the front panel and one at the rear panel. Port 31 Network One RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on Power Port One power port. Input 100-240V50~60Hz. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button One button. At the front-panel. IR Support IR remote control Receiver Window Clock Built-in clock. General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. Power 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 1.5U, 440mm 460mm 68mm n Weight 5kg6kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.17 NVR44-4K Series Specifications NVR44-4K Main Processor Industrial embedded micro processor Operation System Embedded LINUX system System System Max 8-channel1080P connection, Resources User Interface WEB, local GUI Audio Audio Input 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio input Parameters Audio Output 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio output 32 Audio G.711a, G.711u, PCM, G726 Compression Standard Video Input 8/16/32-ch network compression video input Video Parameters Video Output Video 1-channel VGA 2-channel HDMI. Compression H.264 Standard Window Split The 1st screen: 1/4/8/9/16-screen. Mode The 2nd screen: 1/4-screen. Alarm Alarm Input 16-channel Parameters Alarm Output 8-channel relay output Decode Type MPEG4H.264H.265 Decode Parameters Decode Capability 16-channelD1;8-channel720P, 4-channel 1080P;1-channel 4K Record Mode Manual recording, motion detection recording, schedule Multi-Channel Functions Playback recording and alarm recording. Priority: Manual recording>card number recording-> alarm recording>motion detection recording>schedule recording. Max support 64MH265&H264 1:1 playback at the same time. Network Function Motion Detect Each screen supports 396/330((PAL 2218, NTSC 2215) Privacy Mask Each channel supports 4 privacy mask zones. detection zones. Various sensitivity levels. Record Mode Overwrite Backup Mode Flash disk, eSATA, DVD burner. Network Protocol IPv4/IPv6/HTTP/UPnP/NTP/SADP/SNMP/PPPoE/DNS/FTP/ON VIF/PSIA SATA Port 4 SATA Ports eSATA Port 1 eSATA port RS232 Port 1 RS232 port. To debug and transmit COM data. RS485 Port USB Port 1 RS485 port. To control peripheral PTZ and etc. Support various protocols. 1 USB 2.0 port at the front panel and 2 USB3.0 ports at the rear panel. HDMI Port 2 HDMI ports Network Port Power On-off Button 2 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernetet ports+2 1000Mbps self-adaptive fiber ports One at the rear panel. 33 General Parameters 4 indicator lights. 1 system running status indicator light Indicator Light 1 HDD indicator light 1 network status indicator light 1 power status indicator light AC100~240V General series: 17WNo HDD, PoE series: <26.5W No HDD, Power Power Consumption Working 050 Temperature Working Humidity 10%90%No condensation Dimensions (W HD) 44076405mm Weight General series:4.35 kgNo HDD, PoE series: 4.65kg No HDD, Installation Mode Rack/desktop 1.3.18 NVR54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2 Series Specifications NVR54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2 Series Main Processor Industrial embedded micro processor Operation System Embedded LINUX system System System 8/16/32/64-channel main stream connection: max supports Resources 80/160/320/320Mbps User Interface WEB, local GUI Audio Input 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio input Audio Output 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio output Audio Parameters Audio Compression Standard G.711a, G.711u, PCM, G726 (The bidirectional talk supports G.711a, G.711u, PCM only.) Video Input 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input Video Video Output Parameters Video 1-channel VGA 2-channel HDMI. Compression H.264 Standard Window Split Mode 1/4/8/9/16/25/36/64-screen. Alarm Alarm Input 16-channel Parameters Alarm Output 6-channel relay output Decode Type MPEG4MJPGH.264H.265 Decode Parameters Decode Capability H.264/H.265: 64-channelD1, 32-channel720P, 16-channel 1080P; 4-channel 4K. 34 Record Mode Manual recording, motion detection recording, schedule Multi-Channel Functions Playback recording and alarm recording. Priority: Manual recording>card number recording-> alarm recording>motion detection recording>schedule recording. Max support 16-channel 1080P playback at the same time. Motion Detect Each screen supports 396/330((PAL 2218, NTSC 2215) Privacy Mask Each channel supports 4 privacy mask zones. detection zones. Various sensitivity levels. Record Mode Overwrite Backup Mode Flash disk, eSATA, DVD burner. Network Protocol IPv4/IPv6/HTTP/UPnP/NTP/SADP/SNMP/PPPoE/DNS/FTP/
ONVIF(Version 2.4)/PSIA SATA Port 4 SATA Ports eSATA Port 1 eSATA port RS232 Port 1 RS232 port. To debug and transmit COM data. RS485 Port USB Port 1 RS485 port. To control peripheral PTZ and etc. Support various protocols. 1 USB 2.0 port at the front panel and 2 USB3.0 ports at the rear panel. HDMI Port 2 HDMI ports Network Port 2 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet ports Power Port One power socket. Power adapter power supplying. Input AC 100V~240V50Hz~60Hz. Power On-off Button One at the rear panel. 4 indicator lights. Indicator Light 1 HDD indicator light 1 system running status indicator light 1 network status indicator light 1 power status indicator light AC90~264V General series: 16.7WNo HDD 16 PoE series: 17.5WNo HDD Power Power Consumption Working
-1055 Temperature Working Humidity 10%90%No condensation Dimensions (W HD) 44076411mm Network Function General Parameters Weight(No HDD) General series:4.30Kg, PoE series: 4.65Kg, Installation Mode Rack/desktop 1.3.19 NVR48-4K Series 35 Specifications NVR48-4K Main Processor Industrial embedded micro processor Operation System Embedded LINUX system System System Max 8-channel1080P connection, Resources User Interface WEB, local GUI Audio Input 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio input Audio Output 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio output Audio Parameters Audio G.711a, G.711u, PCM, G726 Compression Standard Video Input 8/16/32-ch network compression video input Video Parameters Video Output Video 1-channel VGA 2-channel HDMI. Compression H.264 Standard Window Split The 1st screen: 1/4/8/9/16-screen. Mode The 2nd screen: 1/4-screen. Alarm Alarm Input 16-channel Parameters Alarm Output 6-channel relay output Decode Type MPEG4H.264H.265 Decode Parameters Decode Capability 16-channelD1;8-channel720P, 4-channel 1080P;1-channel 4K Record Mode Manual recording, motion detection recording, schedule Multi-Channel Functions Playback recording and alarm recording. Priority: Manual recording>card number recording-> alarm recording>motion detection recording>schedule recording. Max support 64MH265&H264 1:1 playback at the same time. Motion Detect Each screen supports 396/330((PAL 2218, NTSC 2215) Privacy Mask Each channel supports 4 privacy mask zones. detection zones. Various sensitivity levels. Record Mode Overwrite Backup Mode Flash disk, eSATA, DVD burner. Network Protocol SATA Port IPv4/IPv6/HTTP/UPnP/NTP/SADP/SNMP/PPPoE/DNS/FTP/
ONVIF/PSIA 8 SATA Ports eSATA Port 1 eSATA port RS232 Port 1 RS232 port. To debug and transmit COM data. RS485 Port 1 RS485 port. To control peripheral PTZ and etc. Support various protocols. 36 Network Function General Parameters USB Port 2 USB 2.0 ports at the front panel and 2 USB3.0 ports at the rear panel. HDMI Port 2 HDMI ports Network Port Power On-off Button 2 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernetet ports+2 1000Mbps self-adaptive fiber ports One at the rear panel. 4 indicator lights. Indicator Light 1 HDD indicator light 1 system running status indicator light 1 network status indicator light 1 power status indicator light AC100~240V General series: 18.8WNo HDD, PoE series: <27.9W No HDD, Power Power Consumption Working 050 Temperature Working Humidity 10%90%No condensation Dimensions (W HD) 44095445mm Weight General series:6.6 kgNo HDD, PoE series: 6.75kg No HDD, Installation Mode Rack/desktop 1.3.20 NVR58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series Specifications NVR58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series Main Processor Industrial embedded micro processor Operation System Embedded LINUX system System System 8/16/32/64-channel main stream max supports Resources 80/160/320/320Mbps User Interface WEB, local GUI Audio Input 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio input Audio Output 1-ch MIC bidirectional talk audio output Audio Parameters Audio Compression Standard G.711a, G.711u, PCM, G726 (The bidirectional talk supports G.711a, G.711u, PCM only.) Video Input 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input Video Parameters Video Output Video 1-channel VGA 2-channel HDMI. Compression H.264 Standard 37 Window Split 1/4/8/9/16/25/36/64-screen. Mode Alarm Alarm Input 16-channel Parameters Alarm Output 6-channel relay output Decode Type MPEG4MJPGH.264H.265 Decode Parameters Decode Capability H.264/H.265: 64-channelD1;32-channel720P, 16-channel 1080P;4-channel 4K Record Mode Manual recording, motion detection recording, schedule Multi-Channel Functions Playback recording and alarm recording. Priority: Manual recording>card number recording-> alarm recording>motion detection recording>schedule recording. Max support 16-channel 1080P playback at the same time. Network Function Motion Detect Each screen supports 396/330((PAL 2218, NTSC 2215) Privacy Mask Each channel supports 4 privacy mask zones. detection zones. Various sensitivity levels. Record Mode Overwrite Backup Mode Flash disk, eSATA, DVD burner. Network Protocol IPv4/IPv6/HTTP/UPnP/NTP/SADP/SNMP/PPPoE/DNS/FTP/
ONVIF(Version 2.4)/PSIA SATA Port 8 SATA Ports eSATA Port 1 eSATA port RS232 Port 1 RS232 port. To debug and transmit COM data. RS485 Port USB Port 1 RS485 port. To control peripheral PTZ and etc. Support various protocols. 2 USB 2.0 ports at the front panel and 2 USB3.0 ports at the rear panel. HDMI Port 2 HDMI ports Network Port 2 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet ports Power Port One power socket. Power adapter power supplying. Input AC 100V~240V50Hz~60Hz. Power On-off Button One at the rear panel. 4 indicator lights. Indicator Light 1 HDD indicator light 1 system running status indicator light Power Power General Consumption Parameters Working 1 network status indicator light 1 power status indicator light AC90~264V General series: 16.7WNo HDD 16 PoE series: 17.5WNo HDD Temperature Working Humidity 10%90%No condensation
-1055 38 Dimensions (W HD) 439.795450.8mm Weight (No HDD) General series:6.55Kg, Installation Mode Rack/desktop PoE series: 7Kg. 1.3.21 NVR48/48-16P Series Model NVR48 Series NVR48-16P Series System 8/16/32-channel series product support 8/16/32-channel HD connection System Resource respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports 200Mbps. s Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Decode Compres sion Decode Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, or 4-channel 3M or 2*5M Capacity decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16-window Audio Alarm Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 16-ch alarm input 4-ch alarm output Relay output. Relay DC 30V /1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 4 built-in SATA ports. 1 external eSATA port. Multiple-c Max 8-channel 720P/4-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel 39 Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 3 peripheral USB2.0 ports. Two at the front panel and one at the rear panel. Port Network Two RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps One RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Connecti self-adaptive Ethernet ports. self-adaptive Ethernet port. on Power Port One power port. Input 100-240V50~60Hz. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button One button. At the front-panel. IR Support IR remote control Receiver Window Clock Built-in clock. General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. Power 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 440mm 460mm 89mm n Weight 5.5kg6.5kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.22 NVR72/72-8P Series Model NVR72 Series NVR72-8P Series 40 System System 8/16/32/64-channel series product support 8/16/32/64-channel HD Resource connection respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports s 48/96/192/192Mbps. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG Compres sion Decode Max supports 32-channel D1, or 16-channel 720P, or 8-channel 1080P Capacity decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16/25/36-window Audio Alarm Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 8-ch alarm output 3-ch alarm output Relay output. Relay DC 30V/1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. Multiple-c Max 16-channel 720P/8-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 2 peripheral USB2.0 ports. One at the front panel and one at the rear panel. Port Network 1 RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connecti on 41 Power Port One power port, power adapter. Input DC 12V. One power port. Input 100-240V 47~63Hz. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button One button. At the front-panel. IR Support IR remote control Receiver Window Clock Built-in clock. General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. Power 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 1U case. 295mm275mm47mm n Weight 1.5kg2.5kg (No HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.23 NVR74/74-8P/74-16P Series Model NVR74 Series NVR74-8P Series NVR74-16P Series System System 8/16/32/64-channel series product support 8/16/32/64-channel HD Resource connection respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports s 48/96/192/192Mbps. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG Compres sion 42 Video Audio Alarm Decode Max supports 32-channel D1, or 16-channel 720P, or 8-channel 1080P Capacity decode. Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window 1/4/8/9/16/25/36-window Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 16-ch alarm input 6-ch alarm output Relay output. Relay DC 30V /1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 4 built-in SATA ports. 1 external eSATA port. Multiple-c Max 16-channel 720P/8-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 3 peripheral USB2.0 ports. One at the front panel and two at the rear panel. Port Network Two RJ45 10/100Mbps One RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet Connecti self-adaptive Ethernet port. on Power Port ports. One power port. Input 100-240V50~60Hz. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button One button. At the front-panel. IR Support IR remote control Receiver 43 Window Clock Built-in clock. General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. Power 30W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 1.5U, 440mm 460mm 68mm n Weight 5kg6kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.24 NVR78/78-16P/78-RH Series Model NVR78 Series NVR78-16P Series NVR78-RH Series System System 8/16/32/64-channel series product support 8/16/32/64-channel HD Resource connection respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports s 48/96/192/192Mbps. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG Compres sion Decode Max supports 32-channel D1, or 16-channel 720P, or 8-channel 1080P Capacity decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 2-ch HDMI output
(from different video 44 Audio Alarm Window 1/4/8/9/16/25/36-window sources) Split Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 16-ch alarm input 6-ch alarm output Relay output. Relay DC 30V/1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 8 built-in SATA ports. 1 external eSATA port. 8 built-in SATA ports at the front panel. Support hot swap, Raid0, Raid1, Raid5, Raid6. 1 external eSATA port. Multiple-c Max 16-channel 720P/8-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 4 peripheral USB2.0 ports. Two at the front panel and two at the rear panel. Port Network Two RJ45 10/100/1000 One RJ45 10/100/1000 Two RJ45 10/100/1000 Connecti Mbps self-adaptive Mbps self-adaptive Mbps self-adaptive on Power Port Ethernet ports. One power port. Input 100-240V50~60Hz. Ethernet port. Ethernet ports. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button One button. At the front-panel. IR Support IR remote control Receiver Window Clock Built-in clock. 45 General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. Power 35W(No HDD) Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 440mm460mm89mm n Weight 5.5kg6.5kgNo HDD 444mm430mm89m m 8.5kg 9.5kg No HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.25 NVR70/70-R Series Model NVR70 Series NVR70-R Series System System 8/16/32/64-channel series product support 8/16/32/64-channel HD Resource connection respectively. The main stream bandwidth supports s 48/96/192/192Mbps. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG Compres sion Decode Max supports 32-channel D1, or 16-channel 720P, or 8-channel 1080P Capacity decode. Video Video Input Video Output HDMI 8/16/32/64-ch network compression video input 1-channel VGA analog video output. 1-ch HDMI output. 2-ch HDMI output (from different video sources) Window 1/4/8/9/16/25/36-window Split 46 Audio Alarm Audio Input Audio Output Audio Compres sion Alarm Input Alarm Output 1-ch bidirectional talk input 1-ch bidirectional talk output G.711a 16-ch alarm input 6-ch alarm output Relay output. Relay DC 30V/1AAC 125V/0.5AActivation output Including one controllable DC +12V output. Function Storage 16 built-in SATA ports at the front 16 built-in SATA ports at the front panel. Support removable HDD panel. Support hot swap, Raid0, installation mode. 1 external eSATA port. Raid1, Raid5, Raid6. 1 external eSATA port. Multiple-c Max 16-channel 720P/8-channel 1080P playback at the same time. hannel Playback Port and RS232 One RS232 port to debug transparent COM data. Indicator Port RS485 One RS485 port to control PTZ. Support various protocols. port USB2.0 4 peripheral USB2.0 ports. Two at the front panel and two at the rear panel. Port Network Two RJ45 10/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet ports. Connecti on Power Port One power port. Input 100V240V50~60Hz. Power One button. At the rear panel. Button Power On-off Button One button. At the front-panel. IR Support IR remote control Receiver Window Clock Built-in clock. General Indicator One power status indicator light. Light One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. Power 35W(No HDD) 47 Consump tion Working
-10+55 Temperat ure Working 1090 Humidity Air 86kpa106kpa pressure Dimensio 3U case: 448mm490mm133.2mm n Weight 10.5kg11.5kgNo HDD Installatio Desk installation n 1.3.26 NVR42V-8P Series Model NVR42V-8P System System 8/16/32-channel series product support 8/16/32-channel HD connection Resources respectively. Main stream bandwidth supports 80/160/160Mbps respectively. Operation Embedded Linux real-time operation system System Operation WEB/Local GUI Interface Decode Video H.264/MJPEG/MPEG4 Compression Decode Capacity Max supports 16-channel D1, or 8-channel 720P, or 4-channel 1080P, or 4*3M or 2*5M decode. Video Video Input 8/16/32-ch network compression video input Video Output 1-channel VGA analog video output. HDMI 1-ch HDMI output. Version number is 1.4 Window Split 1/4/8/9/16-window Audio Audio Input 1-ch bidirectional talk input Audio Output 1-ch bidirectional talk output Audio G.711a Compression Alarm Alarm Input 2-ch alarm input Alarm Output 1-ch alarm output Functio Storage 2 built-in SATA ports. n Multiple-chann Max 8-channel 720P/4-channel 1080P playback at the same time. 48 Port and el Playback RS232 Port N/A Indicato RS485 port N/A r USB Port Two USB2.0 ports at the front panel and one USB3.0 port at the rear panel. Network 1 RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port and 8 PoE ports. Connection Power Port One power port. Input DC 53V--2.3A Power Button One button. At the rear panel. Power On-off N/A Button IR Receiver Support IR remote control Window Clock Built-in clock. Indicator Light One power status indicator light. One network status indicator light. One HDD status indicator light. One alarm status indicator light. 30W(No HDD) General Power Consumption Working
-10+55 Temperature Working Humidity 1090 Air pressure 86kpa106kpa Dimension 100mm220mm146mm Weight 1.5kg2.5kgNo HDD Installation Desk installation 49 2 Front Panel and Rear Panel 2.1 Front Panel 2.1.1 NVR11/11-P/41/41-P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. SN Name Function 1 2 3 HDD status indictor light The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal. Power indicator light The red light becomes on when the power connection is OK. Network status indicator The red light becomes on when the network light connection is abnormal. 2.1.2 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-2. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 2-2 50 Icon Name Function NET PWR HDD IR Network status The red light becomes on when the network indicator light connection is abnormal. Power indicator The red light becomes on when the power light HDD status indictor light Remote control receiver connection is OK. The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal. It is to receive signal from the remote control. 2.1.3 NVR11HS Series The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Icon Name Function Network status indicator The red light becomes on when the network light connection is abnormal. Power status indicator The red light becomes on when the power light connection is OK. HDD status indicator light The red light becomes on when the HDD is abnormal. USB port Connect to USB mouse,USB devices and etc. 2.1.4 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-4. 51 Figure 2-4 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Icon HDD NET Name Function HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction. light Network status indicator The blue light is on when the network connection is light abnormal. POWER Power status indicator light The blue light is on when the power connection is USB2.0 port Connect to peripheral USB 2.0 storage device, mouse, burner and etc. OK. 2.1.5 NVR41-8P Series The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-5. Figure 2-5 52 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. SN Name Function 1 2 3 4 Network status indicator The red light becomes on when the network light connection is abnormal. Power indicator light The red light becomes on when the power connection is OK. HDD status indictor light The red light becomes on when HDD is abnormal. USB USB port 2.1.6 NVR42/42-P/42-8P/72/72-8P Series The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Name Icon Function Power button Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR. Shift Shift Up/1 Down/4 In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc. Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down. Increase/decrease numeral. Assistant function such as PTZ menu. In text mode, input number 1/4 (English character G/H/I) Shift current activated control, Left/2 Right/3 When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar. In text mode, input number 2(English character A/B/C) ESC ESC
/3(English character D/E/F)
. Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation. When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode. Enter ENTER Confirm current operation Go to default button 53 Record REC Slow play/8 Assistant Fn Go to menu Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys or numeral keys to select the recording channel. Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback. In text mode, input number 8 (English character T/U/V). One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color. Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor. In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup. In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc. Realize other special functions. Fast play/7 Various fast speeds and normal playback. In text mode, input number 7 (English character P/Q/R/S). Play previous/0
|
In playback mode, playback the previous video In text mode, input number 0. In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to Reverse/Pau se/6
||
reverse playback In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback. In text mode, input number 6 (English character M/N/O) In playback mode, playback the next video Play Next/9
|
. In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list. In text mode, input number 9 (English character W/X/Y/Z)
. In normal playback click this button to pause playback Play/Pause /5 ||
In pause mode, click this button to resume playback. In text mode, input number 5(English character J/K/L). USB port To connect USB storage device, USB mouse. Network abnormal Net indicator light HDD abnormal HDD indicator light Record light 1-16 Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you. HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you. System is recording or not. It becomes on when system is recording. 54 IR Receiver IR It is to receive the signal from the remote control. 2.1.7 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series The NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 series front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-7. The NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-8. Figure 2-7 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Icon Name Function Figure 2-8 STATUS Status indicator light The blue light is on when the device is malfunction. Note NVR21HS-S2 series product does not support STATUS indicator light. HDD NET HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction. light Network status indicator The blue light is on when the network connection is light abnormal. POWER Power status indicator light The blue light is on when the power connection is OK. USB port Connect to peripheral USB storage device, mouse and etc. 2.1.8 NVR42-16P/42N/42-4K/42-8P-4K/44-4K/48-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2
/54-4KS2/58-4KS2 Series The NVR42-16P/42N/42-4K/42-8P-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-9. The NVR44-4K/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2 series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-10. Figure 2-9 55 The NVR48-4K/58-4K/58-16P-4KS2 series front panel is shown as in Figure 2-11. Figure 2-10 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Icon Name Function Figure 2-11 STATUS Status indicator light The blue light is on when the device is malfunction. HDD NET HDD status indicator The blue light is on when the HDD is malfunction. light Network status indicator The blue light is on when the network connection is light abnormal. POWER Power status indicator light The blue light is on when the power connection is USB2.0 port Connect to peripheral USB 2.0 storage device, mouse, burner and etc. OK. 2.1.9 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/74/74-8P/74-16P Series The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-12. Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Name Icon Function Figure 2-12 Power button Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR. 56 Shift Shift In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc. Up/1 Down/4 Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down. Increase/decrease numeral. Assistant function such as PTZ menu. In text mode, input number 1/4 (English character G/H/I) Shift current activated control, Left/2 Right/3 When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar. In text mode, input number 2(English character A/B/C) ESC ESC
/3(English character D/E/F)
. Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation. When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode. Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Go to default button Go to menu Record REC Slow play/8 Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys or numeral keys to select the recording channel. Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback. In text mode, input number 8 (English character T/U/V). One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color. Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor. Assistant Fn In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup. In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc. Realize other special functions. Fast play/7 Various fast speeds and normal playback. In text mode, input number 7 (English character P/Q/R/S). Play previous/0
|
In playback mode, playback the previous video In text mode, input number 0. In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to Reverse/Pau se/6
||
reverse playback In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback. In text mode, input number 6 (English character M/N/O)
. 57 Play Next/9 In playback mode, playback the next video In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list. In text mode, input number 9 (English character W/X/Y/Z)
. In normal playback click this button to pause playback Play/Pause /5 ||
In pause mode, click this button to resume playback. In text mode, input number 5(English character J/K/L). USB port To connect USB storage device, USB mouse. Network abnormal Net indicator light HDD abnormal HDD indicator light Record light 1-16 Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you. HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you. System is recording or not. It becomes on when system is recording. 2.1.10 NVR48/48-16P/78/78-16P Series The Front panel is shown as follows. See Figure 2-13. Figure 2-13 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Name Icon Function Power button Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR. Number button 0-9 Input Arabic number Switch channel
-/--
Input number more than 10 Shift Up/
Down If you want to input a number more than 10, please click this button and then input. In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc. Enable or disable tour. Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down. 58 Increase/decrease numeral. Assistant function such as PTZ menu. Left/
Right Shift current activated control, and then move left and right. When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar. ESC ESC Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation. When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode. Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Go to default button Go to menu Record REC Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys or numeral keys to select the recording channel. Slow play Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback. One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color. Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor. In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to Assistant Fn realize setup. In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc. In HDD management interface, you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information (Menu prompt) Realize other special functions. Fast play Various fast speeds and normal playback. Play previous
|
In playback mode, playback the previous video Reverse/Pause playback In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback. In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to reverse Play Next
|
In playback mode, playback the next video In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list. Play/Pause In normal playback click this button to pause playback In pause mode, click this button to resume playback. 59 Window switch Mult Click it to switch one-window/multiple-window. Shuttle(outer ring) Jog(inner dial) In real-time monitor mode it works as left/right direction key. Playback mode, counter clockwise to forward and clock wise to backward. Up/down direction key. Playback mode, turn the inner dial to realized frame by frame playback. (Only applies to some special versions.) USB port To connect USB storage device, USB mouse. Remote control indicator light Status indicator light Power indicator light ACT Remote control indicator light Status If there is Fn indicator light, current status indicator light is null. PWR Power indicator light For 4/8/16-channel series product. The corresponding channel light becomes on when system is recording. For 32/64-channel series product:
When the light flashes slowly, it means the corresponding channel of 1-16 channel is recording now (Such as channel 1). When the light flashes fast, it means the corresponding channel of 17-32 channel is recording now (Such as channel 17) When the light becomes on, It means the corresponding 2 channels are recoding now (Such as channel 1 and channel 17.). The channel indictor light here does not show the status of It is to receive the signal from the remote control. the 33-64-channel. Channel indictor light 1-32 IR Receiver IR 2.1.11 NVR78-RH Series The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-14. Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Figure 2-14 60 Name Icon Function Power button Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR. Number button 0-9 Input Arabic number Switch channel Input number more than 10 Shift Up/
Down Left/
Right
-/--
If you want to input a number more than 10, please click this button and then input. In textbox, click this button to switch between numeral, English(Small/Capitalized),donation and etc. Enable or disable tour. Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down. Increase/decrease numeral. Assistant function such as PTZ menu. Shift current activated control, and then move left and right. When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar. ESC ESC Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation. When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode. Confirm current operation Enter ENTER Go to default button Go to menu Record REC Manually stop/start recording, working with direction keys or numeral keys to select the recording channel. Slow play Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback. One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color. Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5 seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor. In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to Assistant Fn realize setup. In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc. In HDD management interface, you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information (Menu prompt) Realize other special functions. 61 Fast play Various fast speeds and normal playback. Play previous
|
In playback mode, playback the previous video Reverse/Pause
||
playback In reverse playback, click this button to pause playback. In normal playback or pause mode, click this button to reverse Play Next
|
In playback mode, playback the next video In menu setup, go to down ward of the dropdown list. Play/Pause
||
In normal playback click this button to pause playback In pause mode, click this button to resume playback. Window switch Mult Click it to switch one-window/multiple-window. In real-time monitor mode it works as left/right direction key. Playback mode, counter clockwise to forward and clock wise to backward. Up/down direction key. Playback mode, turn the inner dial to realized frame by frame playback. (Only applies to some special versions.) To connect USB storage device, USB mouse. Shuttle(outer ring) Jog(inner dial) USB port Remote receiver control IR It is to receive signal from the remote control. Remote control indicator light Status indicator light Power indicator light ACT Remote control indicator light Status The light is on if device operates properly. POWER Power indicator light Record light 1-16 It becomes on when system is recording. HDD abnormal status indictor HDD light It becomes on when there is no HDD, HDD error occurs, or HDD is full. 2.1.12 NVR70/70-R Series The front panel is shown as in Figure 2-15. 62 Figure 2-15 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. SN Name Icon Function 1 Power button Press it once to turn on the device. System HDD Indicator light Press it for a long time to turn off the device (Usually we do not recommend). Press power button for a long time or pull out the power cable may result in device auto restart. The blue light flashes when system is reading or writing the system HDD. In the system HDD, there are device important configuration file, factory default configuration file, device initial boot up data. Alarm indicator light The alarm indicator light becomes on once an alarm Network indicator light occurred. It becomes on via the software detection. The alarm includes local alarm, no disk and etc. The network indicator light is blue and it flashes when you connect the device to the network. USB2.0 port Connect to USB2.0 storage device, mouse, USB 16 HDD slot
-
/
burner and etc. 2 3 4 5 6 After you remove the front panel, you can see there are 16 HDDs. From the left to the right and from the top to the bottom, it ranges from 1~4, 5~8, 6~12, 13~16. See Figure 2-16. You can see there are two indicator light s on the HDD bracket. The power indicator light is at the top. The light is yellow after you connected the device to the power. The read-write indicator light is at the bottom. The blue light flashes when system is reading or writing the data. 63 Figure 2-16 2.1.13 NVR42V-8P Series The front panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-17 Figure 2-17 Please refer to the following sheet for front panel button information. Name Icon Function Power button Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down NVR. One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant function: PTZ control and image color. Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5 seconds to delete the previous character before the cursor. In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup. In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English 64 Assistant Fn USB2.0 port IR receive window Power indicator light HDD abnormal indicator light Network abnormal indicator light Alarm indicator light character (small/capitalized) and etc. In HDD management interface, you can click it to switch HDD record information and other information (Menu prompt) Realize other special functions. To connect USB2.0 storage device, USB2.0 mouse, burner and etc. It is to receive the IR signal from the remote control. Power indicator light. HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you. Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you. The light becomes on when an alarm occurred. 2.2 Rear Panel 2.2.1 NVR100/100-P Series The NVR100 rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-18. The NVR100-P rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-19. Figure 2-18 Figure 2-19 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Connection Function USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 65 Port Name Connection Function Network port 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. HDMI High Definition It transmits uncompressed high definition video Media Interface and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the High definition audio and video signal output port. display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA VGA video output port VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. Power socket. Power input port For NVR100 series, input DC 5V/2A. For NVR100-P series, input DC 48V/1.25A. PoE PORT PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. 2.2.2 NVR11/11-P Series The NVR11 rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-20. The NVR11-P rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-21. Figure 2-20 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 2-21 66 Port Name Connection Function USB2.0 port Network port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. HDMI High Definition It transmits uncompressed high definition video Media Interface and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the High definition audio and video signal output port. display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA VGA video output port GND VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. Ground end Power socket. Power input port For NVR11 series, input DC 12V/2A. For NVR11-P series, input DC 48V/1.25A. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. PoE PORT PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. 2.2.3 NVR41/41-P/41-8P/41-W Series The NVR41 rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-22. The NVR41-P rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-23. Figure 2-22 67 The NVR41-8P rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-24. Figure 2-23 The NVR41-W rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-25. Figure 2-24 Figure 2-25 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Connection Function USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 68 Port Name Connection Function Network port 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. HDMI VGA High definition audio and video signal output port. High Definition It transmits uncompressed high definition video Media Interface and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output port VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. Ground end Power socket. GND
/
Power input port For NVR41 series, input DC 12V/2A. For NVR41-P series, input DC 48V/1.5A. For NVR41-8P series, input DC 48V/2A. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. PoE PORT PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. Wireless AP Support wireless hotspot function. Use WIFI to connect to the network camera when there is a hotspot. For 41-W series only. 2.2.4 NVR21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series The NVR21-S2 is shown as in Figure 2-26. The NVR21-P-S2 is shown as in Figure 2-27. Figure 2-26 69 Figure 2-27 The NVR21-8P-S2 is shown as in Figure 2-28. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Connection Function Figure 2-28 HDMI VGA MIC IN Power input port Network port USB port Power socket For NVR21-S2input DC 12V/2A. For NVR21-P-S2input DC 48V/1.25A. For NVR21-8P-S2input DC 48V/2A. 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc. High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can port connect to the monitor to view analog video. Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. GND Ground end 70 Port Name Connection Function PoE PORTS PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. 2.2.5 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series The NVR11H/41H rear panel is shown as in Figure 2-29. The NVR11H-P/41H-P rear panel is shown as in Figure 2-30. Figure 2-29 The NVR41H-8P rear panel is shown as in Figure 2-31. Figure 2-30 Figure 2-31 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Connection Function HDMI VGA USB2.0 port Network port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. High definition audio and video signal output port. High Definition It transmits uncompressed high definition video Media Interface and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output port VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 71 Port Name Connection Function GND Ground end Power socket.
/
Power input port For NVR41H-P series, input DC 48V/1.5A. For NVR41 series, input DC 12V/2A. For NVR11H-P series, input DC 48V/1.25A. For NVR41H-8P series, input DC 48V/2A. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. PoE PORT PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. 2.2.6 NVR11HS Series The series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-32. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 2-32 Icon HDMI VGA Name Power socket. Function input Power socket. Input DC12V/1.5A. Network port USB2.0 port 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, and etc. High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It port can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 72 Icon Name GND Function Ground end 2.2.7 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 Series The NVR21HS-S2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-33. The NVR21HS-P-S2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-34. Figure 2-33 The NVR21HS-8P-S2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-35. Figure 2-34 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Connection Function Figure 2-35 Power input port Network port USB port Power socket. For NVR21HS-S2, input DC 12V/2A. For NVR21HS-P-S2, input DC 48V/1.25A. For NVR21HS-8P-S2, input DC 48V/2A. 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc. High definition audio and video signal output port. It HDMI High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. 73 Port Name Connection Function VGA MIC IN VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can port connect to the monitor to view analog video. Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. PoE PORTS GND Ground end PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. 2.2.8 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series The NVR41HS-W-S2 rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-36. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Icon Name Function Figure 2-36 74 Icon HDMI VGA Name Power socket. Function input Power socket. Input DC12V/2A. Network port USB2.0 port 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, and etc. High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It port GND can connect to the monitor to view analog video. Ground end Wireless AP Support wireless hotspot function. Use WIFI to connect to the network camera when there is a hotspot. 2.2.9 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series The NVR22-S2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-37. The NVR22-P-S2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-38. Figure 2-37 The NVR22-8P-S2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-39. Figure 2-38 Figure 2-39 75 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Connection Function HDMI VGA MIC IN Power input port Network port USB port Power socket. For NVR22-S2, input DC 12V/4A. For NVR22-P-S2, input DC 48V/1.5A. For NVR22-8P-S2, input DC 53V 120W. 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and etc. High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can port connect to the monitor to view analog video. Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. PoE PORTS GND Ground end PoE port Built-in switch. Support PoE function. For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide power to the network camera. 2.2.10 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P Series The NVR42 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-40. The NVR42N series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-41. Figure 2-40 76 The NVR42-P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-42. Figure 2-41 The NVR42-8P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-43. Figure 2-42 The NVR42-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-44. Figure 2-43 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Function Figure 2-44 Power switch Power on/off button. Input DC 12V/5A. For NVR42 series product only. Power input port Switch power port. Input DC 48//1.04A. For NVR42-P series product only. Input AC 100~240V. For NVR42-8P/42-16P series product only. 77 Name Function MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC
(normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. Alarm input port 14 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 12 2 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NONormal open alarm output port. CAlarm output public end. 14 N1, N2 C1, C2 A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. RS-232 HDMI VGA USB2.0 USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, port USB burner and etc. RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or COM. transfer transparent COM data. High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It output port can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 78 Name Function PoE PORTS
/
Bult-in Switch. Support PoE. The 4 PoE series product supports total 48V 50W. The 8 PoE series product supports total 48V 120W. The 16 PoE series product supports total 120W. One PoE port max supports 15W. 2.2.11 NVR42-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series The NVR42-4K/52-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-45. The NVR52-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-46. Figure 2-45 Figure 2-46 The NVR52-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-47. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Icon Port Name Function Figure 2-47 Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. HDMI High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display High definition audio and video signal output port. It device. HDMI version is 1.4. USB3.0 port USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 79 Icon Port Name Function RS-232 VGA RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or COM. transfer transparent COM data. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can port connect to the monitor to view analog video. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. There are two groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4; the second group is from port 5 to port 8. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. 18 Alarm input port 18 GND Alarm input ground port. NO1NO3 C1C3 Alarm output port 13 3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1 port NO1 C1,Group 2:port NO2 C2,Group 3:port NO3C3).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NONormal open alarm output port. CAlarm output public end. A B Power switch PoE PORTS RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. Power input port Input DC 12V/4A.
/
/
Power on/off button. Bult-in Switch. Support PoE.. The 8 PoE series product supports total 130W. The 16 PoE series product supports total 130W. 2.2.12 NVR42-8P-4K Series 80 The NVR42-8P-4K series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-48. Figure 2-48 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Icon Port Name Function Power socket Power switch
/
/
Input AC 220V. Power on/off button. PoE PORTS PoE port Built-in Switchsupport PoE. The PoE PORTS can provide power to the network camera. The 8 PoE ports series product can support 48V 120W. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. HDMI High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display High definition audio and video signal output port. It device. HDMI version is 1.4. USB3.0 port USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. VGA MIC IN VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It port can connect to the monitor to view analog video. Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog MIC OUT Audio output port audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. 14 Alarm 14 input port They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. 81 Icon Port Name Function N1,N2 C1C2 A B GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 12 RS-485 communication port 2 groups of alarm output ports.group 1port NO1C1, group 2port NO2C2. Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NONormal open alarm output port. CAlarm output public end. RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. 2.2.13 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series The NVR44 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-49. The NVR44-8P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-50. Figure 2-49 The NVR44-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-51. Figure 2-50 Figure 2-51 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Function Power switch Power input port
/
/
Power on-off button Input AC 100~240V. 82 Name MIC IN Function Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT Video output port CVBS output 116 Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 Video output port CVBS output Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the
+12V
/
on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. 83 Name Function eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. HDMI VGA PoE PORTS PoE PORTS High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3 VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 8 PoE ports The 8 PoE ports series products supports total 48V Built-in Switch. Support PoE. 120W power. One PoE port max supports 15W. Built-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE ports 16 PoE ports series products supports total 150W power. One PoE port max supports 15W. 2.2.14 NVR44-4K/48-4K/54-4KS2/58-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series The NVR44-4K/NVR48-4K/ NVR54-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-52. The NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-53. Figure 2-52 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Function Figure 2-53 84 Name Function Power switch Power on-off button Power input port Input AC 100~240V. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB3.0 port USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. HDMI High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display High definition audio and video signal output port. It device. HDMI version is 1.4b. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog MIC OUT Audio output port audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. 116 Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 Ground Alarm input ground end. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. 85 Name Function A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off
+12V
/
alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. RS-232 RS232 COM. debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or transfer transparent COM data. VGA VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It port can connect to the monitor to view analog video. PoE PORTS
/
Bult-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE series product supports total 150W. 2.2.15 NVR48/48-16P Series The NVR48 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-54. The NVR48-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-55. Figure 2-54 Figure 2-55 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Function 86 Name Function Power switch Power input
/
/
Power on-off button Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT Video output port CVBS output. 116 Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector. 87 A B RS-485 communication port CTRL 12V
/
Name Function
+12V
/
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port One 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. HDMI VGA PoE PORTS High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3 VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 16 PoE ports series products supports total 150W power. One Built-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE ports PoE port max supports 15W. 2.2.16 NVR72 Series The NVR72 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-56. Figure 2-56 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Function USB2.0 port Network port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. RS-232 RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or COM. transfer transparent COM data. 88 Name Function HDMI VGA High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It output port can connect to the monitor to view analog video. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. There are two groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4; the second group is from port 5 to port 8. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. 18 Alarm input port 18 GND Alarm input ground port. NO1NO3 C1C3 Alarm output port 13 3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1 C1,Group 2:port NO2 C2,Group 3:port NO3 C3 ).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NONormal open alarm output port. CAlarm output public end. A B Power switch RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. Power input port Input DC 12V/5A.
/
Power on/off button. 2.2.17 NVR72-8P Series The NVR72-8P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-57. 89 Figure 2-57 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Function RS-232 HDMI VGA USB2.0 port Network port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP COM. address or transfer transparent COM data. High definition audio and video signal output port. High Definition It transmits uncompressed high definition video Media Interface and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video output port VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 18 Alarm input port 18 There are two groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4; the second group is from port 5 to port 8. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO3 GND Alarm input ground port. C1C3 Alarm output port 13 3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1 C1,Group 2:port NO2 C2,Group 3:port NO3C3).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NONormal open alarm output port. CAlarm output public end. A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. 90 Name Function Power input port Input AC 100~240V. Power switch /
Power on-off button. PoE PORTS Bult-in Switch. Support PoE.
/
The 8 PoE series product supports total 48V 120W. One PoE port max supports 15W. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. 2.2.18 NVR74 Series The NVR74 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-58. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 2-58 Icon Name Function Power switch Power on/off button. Power input port Input AC 100~240V. MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. 91 VIEDEO OUT Video output port CVBS output. HDMI 116 NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 A B CTRL 12V
+12V High definition audio and video signal output port. High Definition It transmits uncompressed high definition video Media Interface and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the Alarm input port 116 display device. HDMI version is 1.3. There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO
(normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1 port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.
/
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port One 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. 92 RS-232 RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP COM. address or transfer transparent COM data. VGA VGA video output port VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 2.2.19 NVR74-8P/74-16P Series The NVR74-8P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-59. The NVR74-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-60. Figure 2-59 Figure 2-60 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Function Power switch
/
Power on-off button Power input
/
Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT Video output port CVBS output 93 Port Name Function 116 Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the
+12V
/
on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. 94 Port Name Function HDMI VGA PoE PORTS PoE PORTS High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3 VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 8 PoE ports The 8 PoE ports series products supports total 48V Built-in Switch. Support PoE. 120W power. One PoE port max supports 15W. Built-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE ports 16 PoE ports series products supports total 150W power. One PoE port max supports 15W. 2.2.20 NVR78 Series The NVR78 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-61. Figure 2-61 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Function Power switch
/
Power on-off button Power input
/
Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT Video output port CVBS output 95 Port Name Function 116 Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
+12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS-232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. 96 Port Name Function HDMI VGA High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 2.2.21 NVR78-16P Series The NVR78-16P series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-62. Figure 2-62 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Function Power switch
/
Power on-off button Power input
/
Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT 116 Video output port CVBS output Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. 97 Port Name Function NO1NO5 C1C5 NC5 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. A B RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
+12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. HDMI VGA PoE PORTS High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3 VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 16 PoE ports series products supports total 150W power. One Built-in Switch. Support PoE. The 16 PoE ports PoE port max supports 15W. 98 2.2.22 NVR78-RH Series The NVR78-RH series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-63. Figure 2-63 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Function Power switch
/
Power on-off button Power input
/
Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT 116 Video output port CVBS output Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port 99 NC5 A B Port Name Function NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
+12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. HDMI VGA High Definition Media Interface High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3. The two HDMI ports to output video from different video sources. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 2.2.23 NVR70 Series The NVR70 series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-64. 100 Figure 2-64 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Function Power switch
/
Power on-off button Power input
/
Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT 116 Video output port CVBS output Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port 101 NC5 A B Port Name Function NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
+12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. HDMI VGA High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3 VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 2.2.24 NVR70-R Series The NVR70-R series rear panel is shown as below. See Figure 2-65. 102 Figure 2-65 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Port Name Function Power switch
/
Power on-off button Power input
/
Input AC 100~240V. port MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the MIC OUT Audio output port analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. VIEDEO OUT 116 Video output port CVBS output Alarm 116 input port There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC (normal close). When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. NO1NO5 C1C5 GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output port 15 5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1port NO1C1,Group 2:port NO2C2,Group 3:port 103 NC5 A B Port Name Function NO3C3, Group 4port NO4C4, Group 5:
port NO5, C5, NC5).Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there is power to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end. NC: Normal close alarm output port. RS-485 communication port RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_B.It is the cable B. You can connect to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. CTRL 12V
/
+12V
/
Controller 12V power output. It is to control the on-off alarm relay output. It can be used to control the device alarm output. At the same time, it can also be used as the power input source of some devices such as the alarm detector.
+12V power output port. It can provide the power to some peripheral devices such as the camera or the alarm device. Please note the supplying power shall be below 1A. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. eSATA eSATA port External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral connected HDD. USB2.0 port USB2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. RS-232 RS232 debug It is for general COM debug to configure IP address COM. or transfer transparent COM data. HDMI VGA High Definition Media Interface High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.3. The two HDMI ports to output video from different video sources. VGA video output VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. port It can connect to the monitor to view analog video. 2.2.25 NVR42V-8P Series The interface is shown as in Figure 2-66. 104 Figure 2-66 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Name Power switch Function
/
Power on/off button. Power input port Input DC 53V--2.3A MIC IN Audio input port Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup. MIC OUT Audio output port Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to the devices such as the sound box. Bidirectional talk output. Audio output on 1-window video monitor. Audio output on 1-window video playback. Alarm input port 12 When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the device and the NVR have the same ground. GND Alarm input ground port. Alarm output public port Alarm output public end. 105 12 C Name Function NO Normal open Normal open alarm output port. Network port 10M/100M/1000Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the network cable. USB3.0 port USB3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB burner and etc. HDMI VGA PoE PORT High definition audio and video signal output port. It High Definition transmits uncompressed high definition video and Media Interface multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4. VGA video VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It output port can connect to the monitor to view analog video. Bult-in Switch. Support PoE.
/
The 8 PoE series product supports total 48V 120W. One PoE port max supports 15W. 2.3 Alarm Connection 2.3.1 Alarm Port The alarm port is shown as below. See Figure 2-67. The following figure is based on the 78 series. Figure 2-67 Icon 116 NO1 C1NO2 C2NO3 C3NO4 C4 NO5 C5 NC5 CTRL 12V 12V Function ALARM1ALARM16. The alarm becomes activated in the low level. Four NO activation output groups. (On-off button). One NO/NC activation output group. (On-off button). Control power output. Disable power output when alarm is canceled. Current is 500mA. Rated current output. Current is 500mA. 106 A/B GND 485 communication port. They are used to control devices such as PTZ. Please parallel connect 120T between A/B cables if there are too many PTZ decoders. Note Different models support different alarm input ports. Please refer to the specifications sheet for detailed information. Slight difference may be found on the alarm port layout. 2.3.2 Alarm input port Connect the positive end (+) of the alarm input device to the alarm input port (ALARM IN 116) of the NVR. Connect the negative end (-) of the alarm input device to the ground end (
) of the NVR. Figure 2-68 Note There are two alarm input types: NO/NC. When connect the ground port of the alarm device to the NVR, you can use any of the GND ports
(
). Connect the NC port of the alarm device to the alarm input port (ALARM) of the NVR. When there is peripheral power supplying for the alarm device, please make sure it is earthed with the NVR. 2.3.3 Alarm input and output port There is peripheral power supplying for the external alarm device. In case overload may result in NVR damage, please refer to the following relay specifications for detailed information. 107 A/B cable of the RS485 is for the A/B cable connection of the speed PTZ. 2.3.4 Alarm relay specifications Model:
JRC-27F Material of the Silver touch Rating Resistance Load Rated switch capacity 30VDC 2A, 125VAC 1A Maximum switch power 125VA 160W Maximum switch voltage 250VAC, 220VDC Maximum switch currency 1A Insulation Between touches with same polarity 1000VAC 1minute Between touches with different 1000VAC 1minute polarity Between touch and winding 1000VAC 1minute Surge voltage Between touches with same polarity 1500V (10160us) Length of open 3ms max time Length of close 3ms max time Longevity Mechanical Temperature Electrical
-40 ~+70 2.4 Bidirectional talk 2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end Device Connection 50106 MIN (3Hz) 200103 MIN (0.5Hz) Please connect the speaker or the pickup to the first audio input port in the device rear panel. Then connect the earphone or the sound box to the audio output port in the PC. Login the Web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor. Please refer to the following interface to enable bidirectional talk. See Figure 2-69. Figure 2-69 Listening Operation At the device end, speak via the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from the earphone or sound box at the pc-end. See Figure 2-70. 108 Figure 2-70 2.4.2 PC-end to the device-end Device Connection Connect the speaker or the pickup to the audio output port in the PC and then connect the earphone or the sound box to the first audio input port in the device rear panel. Login the Web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor. Please refer to the above interface (Figure 2-69) to enable bidirectional talk. Listening Operation At the PC-end, speak via the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from the earphone or sound box at the device-end. See Figure 2-71. Figure 2-71 2.5 Mouse Operation Please refer to the following sheet for mouse operation instruction. Left click When you have selected one menu item, left click mouse to view menu content. mouse Modify checkbox or motion detection status. Click combo box to pop up dropdown list 109 In input box, you can select input methods. Left click the corresponding button on the panel you can input numeral/English character (small/capitalized). Here stands for backspace button. stands for space button. In English input mode: _stands for input a backspace icon and stands for deleting the previous character. In numeral input mode: _ stands for clear and stands for deleting the previous numeral. Double left Implement special control operation such as double click one item in the file list click mouse to playback the video. In multiple-window mode, double left click one channel to view in full-window. Double left click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window mode. Right click In real-time monitor mode, pops up shortcut menu. mouse Exit current menu without saving the modification. Press middle In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value. button Switch the items in the check box. Page up or page down Move mouse Select current control or move control Drag mouse Select motion detection zone Select privacy mask zone. 2.6 Remote Control The remote control interface is shown as in Figure 2-72. Please note remote control is not our standard accessory and it is not included in the accessory bag. 110 Figure 2-72 Serial Number Name Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Power button Click it to boot up or shut down the device. Address Click it to input device number, so that you can control it. Forward Various forward speeds and normal speed playback. Slow play Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback. Next record In playback mode, playback the next video. Previous record In playback mode, playback the previous video. Play/Pause In pause mode, click this button to realize normal playback. In normal playback click this button to pause playback. In real-time monitor mode, click this button to enter video search menu. Reverse/pause Reverse playback pause mode, click this button to realize normal playback. 111 Esc. In reverse playback click this button to pause playback. Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation (close upper interface or control) Record Start or stop record manually 9 10 In record interface, working with the direction buttons to select the record channel. Click this button for at least 1.5 seconds, system can go to the Manual Record interface. 11 Direction keys Switch current activated control, 12 13 14 go to left or right. In playback mode, it is to control the playback process bar. Aux function(such as switch the PTZ menu) Enter /menu key go to default button go to the menu Multiple-window switch Switch between multiple-window Fn and one-window. In 1-ch monitor mode: pop up assistant function PTZ control and Video color. Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control interface. In motion detection interface, working with direction keys to complete setup. In text mode, click it to delete character. 15 0-9 number key Input password, channel or switch channel. Shift is the button to switch the input method. 112 3 Device Installation Note: All the installation and operations here should conform to your local electric safety rules. 3.1 Check Unpacked NVR When you receive the NVR from the forwarding agent, please check whether there is any visible damage. The protective materials used for the package of the NVR can protect most accidental clashes during transportation. Then you can open the box to check the accessories. Please check the items in accordance with the list. Finally you can remove the protective film of the NVR. 3.2 About Front Panel and Rear Panel The model number in the stick on the bottom of NVR is very important; please check according to your purchase order. The label in the rear panel is very important too. Usually we need you to represent the serial number when we provide the service after sales. 3.3 HDD Installation Important Please turn off the power before you replace the HDD. The pictures listed below for reference only. For the first time install, please be aware that whether the HDDs have been installed. You can refer to the Appendix for HDD space information and recommended HDD brand. Please use HDD of 7200rpm or higher. Usually we do not recommend the PC HDD. Please follow the instructions below to install hard disk. 3.3.1 NVR100/100-P Series Please make sure the metal surface of the HDD is facing up when you are installing!
This series NVR has only one 2.5-inch SATA HDD. Please follow the instructions below to install HDD. 1 Draw out the HDD bracket 2 Make sure the HDD metal 3 Put the HDD into the device. surface is facing up and then put the HDD into the bracket 113 horizontally. After the HDD is in the proper position, the columns on the two sides can lock the screw holes of the HDD to secure it. When you remove the HDD, please refer to the following figure to pull the spring up and then remove the HDD. 3.3.2 NVR11/11-P/41/41-P/41-8P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series 1 . Loosen the screws of the upper 2 Fix four screws in the HDD 3 Place the HDD in cover and side panel.
(Turn just three rounds). accordance with the four holes in the bottom. 4 Turn the device upside down and 5 Fix the HDD firmly. 6 Connect the HDD cable and then turn the screws in firmly. power cable. 114 7 Put the cover in accordance with 8 Secure the screws in the rear panel and the side panel. the clip and then place the upper cover back. 3.3.3 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P/11HS/21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2/
41HS-W-S2 Series 1 . Loosen the screws of the upper 2 Fix four screws in the HDD 3 Place the HDD in cover and side panel.
(Turn just three rounds). accordance with the four holes in the bottom. 4 Turn the device upside down and 5 Fix the HDD firmly. 6 Connect the HDD cable then turn the screws in firmly. and power cable. 7 Put the cover in accordance with 8 Secure the screws in the rear panel and the side panel. the clip and then place the upper cover back. 115 3.3.4 NVR42/42N/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/72/72-8P/42-4K/42-8P-4K/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52
-16P-4KS2/22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series The following figures are based on the NVR 72-8P series. 1 Loosen the screws of the upper Fix four screws in the HDD (Turn Place the HDD in accordance with cover and side panel. just three rounds). the four holes in the bottom. Turn the device upside down and Fix the HDD firmly. Connect the HDD cable and power then turn the screws in firmly. cable. Put the cover in accordance with Secure the screws in the rear panel the clip and then place the upper cover and the side panel. back. 3.3.5 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P/74/74-8P/74-16P/44-4K/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2 Series 116 Use the screwdriver to loose the screws of the rear Put the HDD to the HDD bracket in the chassis panel and then remove the front cover. and then line up the four screws to the four holes in the HDD. Use the screwdriver to fix the screws firmly to secure HDD on the HDD bracket Connect to the HDD data cable to the main board and the HDD port respectively. Loosen the power cable of the chassis and connect another end of the power cable to the HDD port. After connect the cable, put the front cover back to the device and then fix screws of the rear panel. 3.3.6 NVR48/48-16P/NVR78/78-16P/48-4K/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series The following figures are based on the NVR78 series. Use the screwdriver to loose the screws of the rear panel and then remove the front cover. Put the HDD to the HDD bracket in the chassis and then line up the four screws to the four holes in the HDD. Use the screwdriver to fix the screws firmly to secure HDD on the HDD bracket 117 Connect to the HDD data cable to the main board After connect the cable, put the front cover and the HDD port respectively. Loosen the power cable back to the device and then fix screws of the rear of the chassis and connect another end of the power panel. cable to the HDD port. 3.3.7 NVR78-RH Series Turn the key into the hole in the front panel. Open the front panel. Put the HDD to the slot and adjust the handle to secure it. Put the front panel back and use the key to fix firmly. HDD Handle Installation 118 Line up the handle to the HDD side (without the interface) Use the screwdriver to fix the handle on the HDD. 3.3.8 NVR70/70-R Series Use four screws to secure the HDD. Put the HDD to the HDD box at the front panel of the device. Please pull the handle up when you are inputing the HDD box in case the the handle Put the HDD to the HDD box at the front panel of the device. 119 collides with the front panel 3.3.9 NVR42V-8P Series Use 4 screws to secure the HDD Pull the HDD knob up when you put the HDD Put the HDD to the HDD box at the front. Put the knob back after you insert the HDD into the box in case the knob buckle may strike to the SATA board. the front panel. 3.4 CD-ROM Installation Please follow the steps listed below. Open top cover and then remove the Take off the bottom of the HDD bracket and CD-ROM HDD bracket bracket. 120 Fix the CD-ROM bracket at the HDD Install a pair of the CD-ROM bracket. Please make bracket. sure the reverse side is secure too. Install SATA burner. Line up the SATA User screwdriver to fix the screws. burner to the hole positions. Put the bracket back. Please adjust the Connect the SATA cable and power wire. CD-ROM to the proper position so that the button of the front panel is directly facing the pop-up button of the CD-ROM. 121 Secure the HDD bracket and put the top cover back. 3.5 Connection Sample 3.5.1 NVR100/NVR100-P Series Please refer to Figure 3-1 for connection sample. Here we take NVR100-P as an example. 3.5.2 NVR11/11-P/41/41-P/41-8P/41-W/21-S2/21-P-S2/21-8P-S2 Series Figure 3-1 122 Please refer to Figure 3-2 for connection sample. Here we take NVR41 as an example. Figure 3-2 3.5.3 NVR11H/11H-P/41H/41H-P/41H-8P Series Please refer to Figure 3-3 for connection sample. Here we take NVR41H as an example. 123 Figure 3-3 3.5.4 NVR11HS//41HS-W-S2 Series Please refer to Figure 3-4 for connection sample. 124 3.5.5 NVR41HS-W-S2 Series Please refer to Figure 3-5 for connection sample. Figure 3-4 125 Figure 3-5 3.5.6 NVR21HS-S2/21HS-P-S2/21HS-8P-S2 Series Please refer to Figure 3-6 for connection sample. Please note the following figure is based on the NVR21HS-8P-S2. 126 Figure 3-6 3.5.7 NVR22-S2/22-P-S2/22-8P-S2 Series Please refer to Figure 3-7 for connection sample. Please note the following figure is based on the NVR22-8P-S2. 127 Figure 3-7 3.5.8 NVR42N Series Please refer to Figure 3-8 for connection sample. Figure 3-8 128 3.5.9 NVR42/42-P/42-8P/42-16P/52-4KS2/52-8P-4KS2/52-16P-4KS2 Series Please refer to Figure 3-9 for connection sample. The following figure is based on our 42-8P series product. 3.5.10 NVR42-4K Series Please refer to Figure 3-10 for connection sample. Figure 3-9 129 3.5.11 NVR42-8P-4K Series Please refer to Figure 3-11 for connection sample. Figure 3-10 3.5.12 NVR44-4K/48-4K/54-4KS2/54-16P-4KS2/58-4KS2/58-16P-4KS2 Series Figure 3-11 130 Please refer to Figure 3-11 for connection sample. The following interface is based on the 44-4K series product. Figure 3-12 3.5.13 NVR44/44-8P/44-16P Series Please refer to Figure 3-13 for connection sample. The following interface is based on the 44-8P series product. 131 Figure 3-13 3.5.14 NVR48/48-16P Series Please refer to Figure 3-14 for connection sample. The following interface is based on the 48-16P series product. Figure 3-14 132 3.5.15 NVR72 Series Please refer to Figure 3-15 for connection sample. 3.5.16 NVR72-8P Series Please refer to Figure 3-16 for connection sample. Figure 3-15 133 Figure 3-16 3.5.17 NVR74 Series Please refer to Figure 3-17 for connection sample. The following figure is based on the 74 series product. 134 Figure 3-17 3.5.18 NVR74-8P/74-16P Series Please refer to Figure 3-18 for connection sample. The following figure is based on the NVR74-8P series product. 135 Figure 3-18 3.5.19 NVR78 Series Please refer to Figure 3-19 for connection sample. 136 Figure 3-19 3.5.20 NVR78-16P Series Please refer to Figure 3-20 for connection sample. 137 Figure 3-20 3.5.21 NVR78-RH Series Please refer to Figure 3-21 for connection sample. 138 Figure 3-21 3.5.22 NVR70 Series Please refer to Figure 3-22 for connection sample. 139 3.5.23 NVR70-R Series Please refer to Figure 3-23 for connection sample. Figure 3-22 140 3.5.24 NVR42V-8P Series Please refer to Figure 3-24 for connection sample. Figure 3-23 141 Figure 3-24 142 4 Local Basic Operation 4.1 Boot up and Shutdown 4.1.1 Boot up Caution Before the boot up, please make sure:
For device security, please connect the NVR to the power adapter first and then connect the device to the power socket. The rated input voltage matches the device power on-off button. Please make sure the power wire connection is OK. Then click the power on-off button. Always use the stable current, if necessary UPS is a best alternative measure. Please follow the steps listed below to boot up the device. Connect the device to the monitor and then connect a mouse. Connect power cable. Click the power button at the front or rear panel and then boot up the device. After device booted up, the system is in multiple-channel display mode by default. 4.1.2 Shutdown Note When you see corresponding dialogue box System is shutting down Do not click power on-off button directly. Do not unplug the power cable or click power on-off button to shutdown device directly when device is running (especially when it is recording.) There are three ways for you to log out. a) Main menu (RECOMMENDED) From Main Menu->Shutdown, select shutdown from dropdown list. Click OK button, you can see device shuts down. b) From power on-off button on the front panel or remote control. Press the power on-off button on the NVR front panel or remote control for more than 3 seconds to shutdown the device. c) From power on-off button on the rear panel. 4.2 Change/Reset Password 4.2.1 Change Password For your own safety, please change your administrator default password after your first login. After system booted up, you can see the following interface if it is your first login or you have restored default setup. See Figure 4-1. Please input old password and then input new password twice to confirm the change. The default administrator user name is admin and the password is admin. You can set security questions here to reset the password in case you forgot. System supports customized setup. Please note you need to set two security questions at the same time. When you reset the password, you need to answer these two security questions too. 143 For reset information, please refer to chapter 4.2.2. Figure 4-1 Click Cancel button, system pops up the following interface for you to confirm. See Figure 4-2. Check the box here, system will not pop up the change password interface the next time. Figure 4-2 4.2.2 Reset Password Once you forgot password, you can answer the security questions you set in chapter 4.2.1 to reset the password. In login interface, click
. See Figure 4-3. 144 Figure 4-3 System pops up the following dialogue box, please answer the security questions and then input the new password twice. See Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 4.3 Startup Wizard After device successfully booted up, it goes to startup wizard. Click Cancel/Next button, you can see system goes to login interface. Tips Check the box Startup button here, system goes to startup wizard again when it boots up the next time. Cancel the Startup button, system goes to the login interface directly when it boots up the next time. 145 Figure 4-5 Click Smart add, Cancel button or Next button, system goes to login interface. See Figure 4-6. System consists of three accounts:
Username: admin. Password: admin. (administrator, local and network) Username: 888888. Password: 888888. (administrator, local only) Username: default. Password: default (hidden user). Hidden user default is for system interior use only and can not be deleted. When there is no login user, hidden user default automatically login. You can set some rights such as monitor for this user so that you can view some channel view without login. Figure 4-6 Note:
For security reason, please modify password after you first login. Within 30 minutes, three times login failure will result in system alarm and five times login failure will result in account lock!
For detailed smart add information, please refer to chapter 4.5. Click OK button, you can go to General interface. See Figure 4-7. For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.16.1. 146 Click Next button, you can go to network interface. See Figure 4-8. For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.14. Figure 4-7 Figure 4-8 Click Next button, you can set P2P function. Scan the QR code, download the App to the cellphone, you can use the smart phone to add the device. See Figure 4-9. For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.14.1.16. 147 Click Next button, you can go to remote device interface. See Figure 4-10. For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.5. Figure 4-9 Figure 4-10 148 Click Next button, you can go to Schedule interface. See Figure 4-11. For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.10.2. Figure 4-11 Click Finish button, system pops up a dialogue box. Click the OK button, the startup wizard is complete. See Figure 4-12. Figure 4-12 4.4 Navigation Bar You need to go to the Main menu->Setting->System->General to enable navigation bar function;
otherwise you can not see the following interface. The navigation bar is shown as below. See Figure 4-13. Figure 4-13 149 4.4.1 Main Menu Click button to go to the main menu interface. 4.4.2 Dual-screen operation Important This function is for some series only. Click to select screen 2, you can view an interface shown as below. See Figure 4-14. It is a navigation bar for screen 2. Figure 4-14 Click any screen split mode; HDMI2 screen can display corresponding screens. Now you can control two screens. See Figure 4-15. Figure 4-15 Note Screen 2 function is null if tour is in process. Please disable tour function first, Right now, the screen 2 operation can only be realized on the navigation bard. The operations on the right-click menu are for screen 1 only. 4.4.3 Output Screen Select corresponding window-split mode and output channels. 4.4.4 Tour Click button 4.4.5 PTZ to enable tour, the icon becomes
, you can see the tour is in process. Click
, system goes to the PTZ control interface. Please refer to chapter 4.9.2. 4.4.6 Color Click button
, system goes to the color interface. Please refer to chapter 4.7.4.1. Please make sure system is in one-channel mode. 4.4.7 Search Click button
, system goes to search interface. Please refer to chapter 4.11.2 4.4.8 Alarm Status 150 Click button
, system goes to alarm status interface. It is to view device status and channel status. Please refer to chapter 4.17.1.4. 4.4.9 Channel Info Click button
, system goes to the channel information setup interface. It is to view information of the corresponding channel. See Figure 4-16. Figure 4-16 4.4.10 Registration Click
, system goes to the registration interface. Please refer to chapter 4.5. 4.4.11 Network Click
, system goes to the network interface. It is to set network IP address, default gateway and etc. Please refer to chapter 4.14. 4.4.12 HDD Manager Click system goes to the HDD manager interface. It is to view and manage HDD information. Please refer to chapter 4.15.1. 4.4.13 USB Manager Click system goes to the USB Manager interface. It is to view USB information, backup and update. Please refer to chapter 4.12.1 file backup, chapter 4.12.3 backup log, chapter4.12.2 import/export, and chapter 4.17.5 upgrade for detailed information. 4.5 Smart Add 151 When the network camera(s) and the NVR are in the same router or switch, you can use smart add function to add all network cameras to the NVR at the same time. There are two ways for you to go to the smart add interface. From the startup wizard, click Smart add button. See Figure 4-17. On the preview interface, right click mouse and then select Smart add. See Figure 4-18. Figure 4-17 Now you can go to the smart add interface. See Figure 4-19. Figure 4-18 152 Click smart add button, you can see device enables DHCP function. See Figure 4-20. Figure 4-19 Figure 4-20 153 System pops up the following interface for you to confirm IP information if there are several IP segments. See Figure 4-21. Now you can see system is auto adding IPC to the corresponding channels. See Figure 4-22. Figure 4-21 Figure 4-22 154 You can see the following dialog box after system successfully added network cameras. See Figure 4-23. Figure 4-23 4.6 Camera 4.6.1 Registration From Main menu->Setting->Camera->Registration, you can see the following interface. See Figure 4-24. Device search: Click the button; you can search all network cameras in the same network segment. Channel: It is the device channel number. If you have not added the network camera, the channel number is shown as . Status: Red circle (
) means current channel has no video, green circle (
) means current channel has video. IP address: It is to display network camera IP address. Type: There are two connection types. You can use the network to connect to the camera or use the WIFI. The means current network camera connection mode is general; the means current network camera mode is hotspot. Add/Delete: Click Manual Add: Click Manual Add button, you can set the corresponding network camera information to add the device to the NVR. to delete the device, click and then select the channel you want to add. The interface is similar to Figure 4-25. 155 Figure 4-24 Modify: Click Modify button, you can see the following interface. See Figure 4-25. Name: Change current channel name. Protocol: Select protocol from the dropdown list. IP Address: Input IP address here. TCP port: Input TCP port value. User name/Password: Input user name and password. The default user name is admin and the default password is admin. Decoder butter: There are three options: realtime/fluent/default. Please select from the dropdown list. Channel: Current channel number. 156 Figure 4-25 4.6.2 Short-Cut Menu In the preview interface, for the channel of no IPC connection, you can click the icon + in the centre of the interface to quickly go to the registration interface (Figure 4-24.). See Figure 4-26. Figure 4-26 4.6.3 Image From main menu->setting->camera->image, you can see the image interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-27. Channel: Select a channel from the dropdown list. Saturation: It is to adjust monitor window saturation. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number, the strong the color is. This value has no effect on the general brightness of the whole video. The video color may become too strong if the value is too high. For the grey part of the video, the distortion may occur if the white balance is not accurate. Please note the video may not be attractive if the value is too low. The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. 157 Brightness: It is to adjust monitor window bright. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number is, the bright the video is. When you input the value here, the bright section and the dark section of the video will be adjusted accordingly. You can use this function when the whole video is too dark or too bright. Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too high. The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. Contrast: It is to adjust monitor window contrast. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number is, the higher the contrast is. You can use this function when the whole video bright is OK but the contrast is not proper. Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too low. If this value is too high, the dark section may lack brightness while the bright section may over exposure .The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. Auto Iris: It is for the device of the auto lens. You can check the box before ON to enable this function. The auto iris may change if the light becomes different. When you disable this function, the iris is at the max. System does not add the auto iris function in the exposure control. This function is on by default. Mirror: It is to switch video up and bottom limit. This function is disabled by default. Flip: It is to switch video left and right limit. This function is disabled by default. BLC: It includes several options: BLC/WDR/HLC/OFF. BLC: The device auto exposures according to the environments situation so that the darkest area of the video is cleared WDR: For the WDR scene, this function can lower the high bright section and enhance the brightness of the low bright section. So that you can view these two sections clearly at the same time. The value ranges from 1 to 100. When you switch the camera from no-WDR mode to the WDR mode, system may lose several seconds record video. HLC: After you enabled HLC function, the device can lower the brightness of the brightest section according to the HLC control level. It can reduce the area of the halo and lower the brightness of the whole video. OFF: It is to disable the BLC function. Please note this function is disabled by default. Profile: It is to set the white balance mode. It has effect on the general hue of the video. This function is on by default. You can select the different scene mode such as auto, sunny, cloudy, home, office, night, disable and etc to adjust the video to the best quality. Auto: The auto white balance is on. System can auto compensate the color temperature to make sure the vide color is proper. Sunny: The threshold of the white balance is in the sunny mode. Night: The threshold of the white balance is in the night mode. Customized: You can set the gain of the red/blue channel. The value reneges from 0 to 100. Day/night. It is to set device color and the B/W mode switch. The default setup is auto. Color: Device outputs the color video. Auto: Device auto select to output the color or the B/W video according to the device feature (The general bright of the video or there is IR light or not.) B/W: The device outputs the black and white video. Sensor: It is to set when there is peripheral connected IR light. Please note some non-IR series product support sensor input function. 158 Figure 4-27 4.6.4 Channel Name From main menu->Setting->Camera-Channel name, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-28. It is to modify channel name. It max supports 31-character. Please note you can only modify the channel name of the connected network camera. Figure 4-28 159 4.6.5 Upgrade Note Right now, the NVR can upgrade the IPC via the USB device or WEB. You can upgrade 8 network cameras of the same model (or the NVR supported) at the same time. It is to update the network camera. From main menu->setting->camera->remote, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-29. Click Browse button and then select the upgrade file. Then select a channel (or you can select device type filter to select several devices at the same time.) Click Begin button to upgrade. You can see the corresponding dialogue once the upgrade is finish. Figure 4-29 4.6.6 UPNP Important Do not connect the switch to the PoE port, otherwise the connection may fail!
Please connect the IPC to the PoE port of the device rear panel (Figure 4-30), system can auto connect to the network camera. Please note the following figure is for reference only. Figure 4-30 160 4.6.7 Built-in Switch Setup The built-in switch function is for product of PoE port. From Main menu->Setting->Network->Switch, you can set switch IP address, subnet mask, gateway and etc. See Figure 4-31. Figure 4-31 4.7 Preview After device booted up, the system is in multiple-channel display mode. See Figure 4-32.Please note the displayed window amount may vary. The following figure is for reference only. Please refer to chapter 1.3 Specifications for the window-amount your product supported. Figure 4-32 4.7.1 Preview 161 If you want to change system date and time, you can refer to general settings (Main Menu->Setting->System->General). If you want to modify the channel name, please refer to the display settings (Main Menu->Camera->CAM name) Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. 1 2 Recording status Motion detection 3 4 Video loss Camera lock Tips Preview drag: If you want to change position of channel 1 and channel 2 when you are previewing, you can left click mouse in the channel 1 and then drag to channel 2, release mouse you can switch channel 1 and channel 2 positions. Use mouse middle button to control window split: You can use mouse middle button to switch window split amount. 4.7.2 Preview control interface Move you mouse to the top centre of the video of current channel, you can see system pops up the preview control interface. See Figure 4-33. If your mouse stays in this area for more than 6 seconds and has no operation, the control bar automatically hides. 1 2 3 4 6 7 Figure 4-33 Digital Channel 1) Realtime playback It is to playback the previous 5-60 minutes record of current channel. Please go to the Main menu->Setting->->System->General to set real-time playback time. System may pop up a dialogue box if there is no such record in current channel. 2) Digital zoom It is to zoom in specified zone of current channel. It supports zoom in function of multiple -channel. Click button
, the button is shown as
. There are two ways for you to zoom in. Drag the mouse to select a zone, you can view an interface show as Figure 4-34. Figure 4-34 162 Put the middle button at the centre of the zone you want to zoom in, and move the mouse, you can view an interface shown as in Figure 4-35. Figure 4-35 Right click mouse to cancel zoom and go back to the original interface. 3) Manual record function It is to backup the video of current channel to the USB device. System can not backup the video of multiple-channel at the same time. Click button
, system begins recording. Click it again, system stops recoridng. You can find the record file on the flash disk. 4) Manual Snapshot Click to snapshot 1-5 times. The snapshot file is saved on the USB device or HDD. You can go to the Search interface (chapter 4.11) to view. 5) Bidirectional talk If the connected front-end device supports bidirectional talk function, you can click this button. Click button to start bidirectional talk function the icon now is shown as
. Now the rest bidirectional talk buttons of digital channel becomes null too. Click again, you can cancel bidirectional talk and the bidirectional talk buttons of other digital channels become as
. 6) Registration Shortcut menu. Click it to go to the registration interface to add/delete remote device or view its corresponding information. Please refer to chapter4.6.2 for detailed information. 4.7.3 Right Click Menu After you logged in the device, right click mouse, you can see the short cut menu. Please see Figure 4-36. Window split mode: You can select window amount and then select channels. PTZ: Click it to go to PTZ interface. Fish eye(optional): It is to realize fish eye operation. Auto focus: It is to set auto focus function. Please make sure the connected network camera supports this function. Color setting: Set video corresponding information. 163 Search: Click it to go to Search interface to search and playback a record file. Record control: Enable/disable record channel. Alarm output: It is to set alarm output mode. Camera registration: Search and add a remote device. Alarm output: Generate alarm output signal manually. Main menu: Go to system main menu interface. Tips:
Right click mouse to go back to the previous interface. Figure 4-36 4.7.4 Preview Display Effect Setup 4.7.4.1 Video Color Here you can set hue, brightness, contrast, saturation, gain, white level, color mode a nd etc. See Figure 4-37. Figure 4-37 164 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Item Period Note There are two periods in one day. You can set different sharpness, brightness, and contrast setup for different periods. Effective Time Check the box here to enable this function and then set period time. The value here is to adjust the edge of the video. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The larger the value is, the clear the edge Sharpness is and vice versa. Please note there is noise if the value here is too high. The default value is 50 and the recommended value Brightness Contrast Saturation ranges from 40 to 60. It is to adjust monitor window bright. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number, the bright the video is. When you input the value here, the bright section and the dark section of the video will be adjusted accordingly. You can use this function when the whole video is too dark or too bright. Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too high. The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. It is to adjust monitor window contrast. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number, the higher the contrast is. You can use this function when the whole video bright is OK but the contrast is not proper. Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too low. If this value is too high, the dark section may lack brightness while the bright section may over exposure .The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. It is to adjust monitor window saturation. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number, the strong the color is. This value has no effect on the general brightness of the whole video. The video color may become too strong if the value is too high. For the grey part of the video, the distortion may occur if the white balance is not accurate. Please note the video may not be attractive if the value is too low. The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. Gain The gain adjust is to set the gain value. The default value may vary due to different device models. The smaller the value, the low the noise. But the brightness is also too low in the dark environments. It can enhance the video brightness if the value is high. But the video noise may become too clear. Color mode It includes several modes such as standard, color, bright, gentle. Select a color mode, the sharpness, brightness, contrast and etc can automatically switch to corresponding setup. 165 4.7.4.2 Display From Main Menu->Setting->System->Display, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-38. Here you can set menu and video preview effect. All you operation here does not affect the record file and playback effect. Figure 4-38 Now you can set corresponding information. Display the intelligent rule(s): Check the box to enable IVS function, system can display IVS rule on the preview interface. Please note this function is for some series only. Resolution: There are five options: 12801024 (Default), 1280720, 19201080, 1024768 and 38402160. Please note the system needs to reboot to activate current setup. Please note 38402160 is for some series only. 166 VGA+HDMI2: It is for dual-screen operation. Please select from the dropdown list according to your actual situation. Click Apply button, system needs to restart to activate new setup. For example, 32+4 means for VGA, system max supports 32-window split and for HDMI2, system max supports 4-window split. Please note this function is for some series only. Color mode: Please select from the dropdown list. It is to set video color mode. Transparency: Here is for you to adjust menu transparency. The higher the value is, the better transparent the menu is. Channel name: Here is for you to modify channel name. System max support 25-digit (The value may vary due to different series). Please note all your modification here only applies to NVR local end. You need to open web or client end to refresh channel name. Time display: You can select to display time or not when system is playback. Channel display: You can select to channel name or not when system is playback. Image enhance: Check the box; you can optimize the margin of the preview video. Original scale: Check the box here to select a corresponding channel; it can restore video original scale. Click OK button to save current setup. Note 4.7.4.3 TV adjust Some series product supports TV adjust function. This function is disabled by default. From Main Menu->Setting->System->Display->TV adjust; you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-38. Here you can set margins and brightness. Figure 4-39 4.7.5 Preview Tour Parameters Set preview display mode, channel display sequence and tour setup. 167 Set preview display mode: On the preview interface, right click mouse, you can view right-click menu. Now you can select preview window amount and channel. Set channel display mode: On the preview interface, if you want to change channel 1 and channel 16 position, please right click channel 1 video window and then drag to the channel 16 video window, release button, you can change channel 1 and channel 16 position. Tour setup: Here you can set preview window channel display mode and interval. Please follow the steps listed below. From Main menu->Setting->System->Display->Tour, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-40. Here you can set tour parameter. Enable tour: Check the box here to enable tour function. The general tour supports all types of window split mode. Interval: Input proper interval value here. The value ranges from 1-120 seconds. Motion tour type: System support 1/8-window tour. Please note you need to go to the main menu->Setting->Event->Video detect->Motion detect to enable tour function. Alarm tour type: System support 1/8-window tour. Please note you need to go to the main menu->Setting->Event->Alarm to enable tour function. Window split: It is to set window split mode. Figure 4-40 Tips On the navigation bar, click
/
to enable/disable tour. Click Save button to save current setup. 4.8 Fish eye (Optional) Please note this function is for some series only. 4.8.1 Fish eye de-warp during preview interface On the preview interface, select fish eye channel and then right click mouse, you can select fish eye. See 168 Figure 4-41. Figure 4-41 Now you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-42. You can set fish eye installation mode and display mode. Note:
For the non-fish eye channel, system pops up dialogue box to remind you it is not a fish eye channel and does not support de-warp function. If system resources are insufficient, system pops up the corresponding dialogue box too. Figure 4-42 169 There are three installation modes: ceiling mount/wall mount/ground mount. The different installations modes have different de-warp modes. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Installation modes Icon Note Ceiling mount Ground mount Wall mount 360panorama original view 1 de-warp window+1 panorama stretching 2 panorama stretching view 1 360 panorama view+3 de-warp windows 1 360panorama view+4 de-warp windows 4 de-warp windows+1 panorama stretching 1 360 panorama view+8 de-warp windows 360panorama original view Panorama stretching 1 panorama unfolding view+3 de-warp windows 1 panorama unfolding view +4 de warp windows 1 panorama unfolding view +8 de warp windows Figure 4-43 In Figure 4-43, you can adjust the color pane on the left pane or use your mouse to change the position of the small images on the right pane to realize fish eye de-warp. 170 4.8.2 Fish eye de-warp during playback On the main menu, click search button. Select 1-window playback mode and corresponding fish eye channel, click to play. Right click the
, you can go to the de-warp playback interface. For detailed information, please refer to chapter 4.8.1. 4.9 PTZ Note:
Before you control the PTZ, please make sure the PTZ decoder and the NVR network connection is OK and the corresponding settings are right. 4.9.1 PTZ Settings Cable Connection Please follow the procedures below to go on cable connection Connect the dome RS485 port to NVR RS485 port. Connect dome video output cable to NVR video input port. Connect power adapter to the dome. In the main menu, from Setting->System->PTZ, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-44. Here you can set the following items:
Channel: Select the current camera channel. PTZ type: There are two types: local/remote. Please select local mode if you are connect RS485 cable to connect to the Speed dome (PTZ). Please select remote mode if you are connecting to the network PTZ camera. Protocol: Select corresponding PTZ protocol(such as PELCOD) Address: Default address is 1. Baud rate: Select corresponding baud rate. Default value is 9600. Data bit: Select corresponding data bits. Default value is 8. Stop bit: Select corresponding stop bits. Default value is 1. Parity: There are three options: odd/even/none. Default setup is none. 171 If you are connecting to network PTZ, the PTZ type shall be remote. See Figure 4-45. Figure 4-44 Figure 4-45 4.9.2 PTZ Control After completing all the setting please click save button. Right click mouse (click Fn Button in the front panel or click Fn key in the remote control). The interface is shown as in Figure 4-46. Please note you can only go to the PTZ control interface when you are in 1-window display mode. 172 Figure 4-46 The PTZ setup is shown as in See Figure 4-47. Please note the commend name is grey once device does not support this function. The PTZ operation is only valid in one-window mode. Here you can control PTZ direction, speed, zoom, focus, iris, preset, tour, scan, pattern aux function, light and wiper, rotation and etc. Speed is to control PTZ movement speed. The value ranges from 1 to 8.The speed 8 is faster than speed 1. You can use the remote control to click the small keyboard to set. You can click and of the zoom, focus and iris to zoom in/out, definition and brightness. The PTZ rotation supports 8 directions. If you are using direction buttons on the front panel, there are only four directions: up/down/left/right. Figure 4-47 In the middle of the eight direction arrows, there is a 3D intelligent positioning key. See Figure 4-48. Please make sure your protocol supports this function and you need to use mouse to control. Click this key, system goes back to the single screen mode. Drag the mouse in the screen to adjust section size. The dragged zone supports 4X to 16X speeds. It can realize PTZ automatically. The smaller 173 zone you dragged, the higher the speed. Figure 4-48 Name Function function Shortcut Function function Shortcut key key key Zoom Focus Iris Near Near close Far key Far Open In Figure 4-47, click to open the menu, you can set preset, tour, pattern, scan and etc. See Figure 4-49. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 4-49 Please note the above interface may vary due to different protocols. The button is grey and can not be selected once the current function is null. Right click mouse or click the ESC button at the front panel to go back to the Figure 4-47. Icon Function Icon Function Preset Tour Pattern Scan Rotate Flip Reset Aux Aux on-off button Go to menu 4.9.2.1 PTZ Function Setup 174 Click
, you can go to the following interface to set preset, tour, pattern, and scan. See Figure 4-50. Figure 4-50 Preset Setup In Figure 4-50, click preset button and use eight direction arrows to adjust camera to the proper position. The interface is shown as in Figure 4-51. Click Set button and then input preset number. Click Set button to save current preset. Figure 4-51 Tour Setup In Figure 4-50, click tour button. Input tour value and preset No. Click Add preset button to add current preset to the tour. See Figure 4-52. Tips Repeat the above steps to add more presets to the tour. Click Del preset button to remove it from the tour. Please note some protocols do not support delete preset function. 175 Figure 4-52 Pattern Setup In Figure 4-50, click Pattern button and input pattern number. Click Begin button to start direction operation. Or you can go back to Figure 4-47 to operate zoom/focus/iris/direction operation. In Figure 4-50, click End button. Figure 4-53 Scan Setup In Figure 4-50, click Scan button. Use direction buttons to set camera left limit and then click Left button. Use direction buttons to set camera right limit and then click Right button. Now the scan setup process is complete. 176 Figure 4-54 4.9.2.2 Call PTZ Function Call Preset In Figure 4-49, input preset value and then click Call Pattern to call a preset. Click again to stop call. In Figure 4-49, input pattern value and then click to call a pattern. Click again to stop call. Call Tour In Figure 4-49, input tour value and then click Call Scan to call a tour. Click again to stop call. In Figure 4-49, input Scan value and then click to call a tour. Click again to stop call. Rotate In Figure 4-49, click System supports preset, tour, pattern, scan, rotate, light and etc function. to enable the camera to rotate. Note:
Preset, tour and pattern all need the value to be the control parameters. You can define it as y ou require. You need to refer to your camera users manual for Aux definition. In some cases, it can be used for special process. Aux Click number is corresponding to the aux on-off button of the decoder. See Figure 4-55.
, system goes to the following interface. The options here are defined by the protocol. The aux 177 Figure 4-55 4.10 Record and Snapshot The record/snapshot priority is: Alarm->Motion detect->Schedule. 4.10.1 Encode 4.10.1.1 Encode Encode setting is to set IPC encode mode, resolution, bit stream type and etc From Main menu->Setting->System->Encode, you can see the following interface. See Figure 4-56. Channel: Select the channel you want. Type: Please select from the dropdown list. There are three options: regular/motion detect/alarm. You can set the various encode parameters for different record types. Compression: System supports H.264, MPEG4, MJPEG and etc. Resolution: The mainstream resolution type is IPCs encoding config. Generally there is D1/720P/1080P. For NVR42-4K, NVR42-8P-4K series product, the main stream supports 2048 15363M,192010801080P, 12801024SGA, 12809601.3M,1280720720P,704 576D1and the sub stream supports 704576D1,352288CIF. Frame rate: It ranges from 1f/s to 25f/s in NTSC mode and 1f/s to 30f/s in PAL mode. Bit rate type: System supports two types: CBR and VBR. In VBR mode, you can set video quality. Quality: There are six levels ranging from 1 to 6. The sixth level has the highest image quality. Video/audio: You can enable or disable the video/audio. Please note, once you enable audio function for one channel, system may enable audio function of the rest channels by default. CopyAfter you complete the setup, you can click Copy button to copy current setup to other channel(s). You can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-59. You can see current channel number is grey. Please check the number to select the channel or you can check the box ALL. Please click the OK button in Figure 4-59 and Figure 4-57 respectively to complete the setup. Please note, once you check the All box, you set same encode setup for all channels. Audio/video enable box, overlay button and the copy button is shield. Please highlight icon to select the corresponding function. 178 Figure 4-56 4.10.1.2 Overlay Click overlay button, you can see an interface is shown in Figure 4-57. Cover area: Here is for you to cover area section. You can drag you mouse to set proper section size. In one channel video, system max supports 4 zones in one channel. You can set with Fn button or direction buttons. Preview/monitor: The cover area has two types. Preview and Monitor. Preview means the privacy mask zone can not be viewed by user when system is in preview status. Monitor means the privacy mask zone can not be view by the user when system is in monitor status. Time display: You can select system displays time or not when you playback. Please click set button and then drag the title to the corresponding position in the screen. Channel display: You can select system displays channel number or not when you playback. Please click set button and then drag the title to the corresponding position in the screen. 179 Figure 4-57 4.10.1.3 Snapshot Here you can set snapshot mode, picture size, quality and frequency. See Figure 4-58. Snapshot mode: There are two modes: regular and trigger. If you set regular mode, you need to set snapshot frequency. If you set trigger snapshot, you need to set snapshot activation operation. Image size: Here you can set snapshot picture size. Image quality: Here you can set snapshot quality. The value ranges from 1 to 6. Interval: It is for you to set timing (schedule) snapshot interval. 180 Figure 4-58 Figure 4-59 4.10.2 Schedule The record type priority is: Alarm>Motion detect>Regular. 4.10.2.1 Schedule Record Set record time, record plan and etc. Please note system is in 24-hour record by default after its first boot up. In the main menu, from Main menu->Setting->Storage->Schedule, you can go to schedule menu. See Figure 4-63. There are total six periods. 181 Channel: Please select the channel number first. You can select all if you want to set for the whole channels.
: Sync connection icon. Select icon of several dates, all checked items can be edited or together. Now the icon is shown as
.
: Click it to delete a record type from one period. Record Type: Please check the box to select corresponding record type. There are four types:
Regular/MD (motion detect)/Alarm/MD&Alarm. Week day: There are eight options: ranges from Saturday to Sunday and all. Holiday: It is to set holiday setup. Please note you need to go to the General interface (Main Menu->Setting->System->General) to add holiday first. Otherwise you can not see this item. Pre-record: System can pre-record the video before the event occurs into the file. The value ranges from 1 to 30 seconds depending on the bit stream. Redundancy: System supports redundancy backup function. It allows you backup recorded file in two disks. You can highlight Redundancy button to activate this function. Please note, before enable this function, please set at least one HDD as redundant. (Main menu ->Setting->Storage->HDD Manager). Please note this function is null if there is only one HDD. ANR: It is to save video to the SD card of the network camera in case the network connection fails. The value ranges from 0s43200s. After the network connection resumed, the system can get the video from the SD card and there is no risk of record loss. Period setup: Click button after one date or a holiday, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-64.There are four record types: regular, motion detection (MD), Alarm, MD & alarm. Please following the steps listed below to draw the period manually. a) Select a channel you want to set. See Figure 4-60. Figure 4-60 b) Set record type. See Figure 4-61. Figure 4-61 c) Please draw manually to set record period. There are six periods in one day. See Figure 4-62. 182 Figure 4-62 Please check the box to select the corresponding function. After completing all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. There are color bars for your reference. Green color stands for regular recording, yellow color stands for motion detection and red color stands for alarm recording. The white means the MD and alarm record is valid. Once you have set to record when the MD and alarm occurs, system will not record neither motion detect occurs nor the alarm occurs. Figure 4-63 183 Figure 4-64 Quick Setup Copy function allows you to copy one channel setup to another. After setting in channel 1, click Copy button, you can go to interface Figure 4-65. You can see current channel name is grey such as channel 1. Now you can select the channel you want to paste such as channel 5/6/7. If you want to save current setup of channel 1 to all channels, you can click the first box ALL. Click the OK button to save current copy setup. Click the OK button in the Encode interface, the copy function succeeded. Please note, if you select ALL in Figure 4-65, the record setup of all channels are the same and the Copy button becomes hidden. Figure 4-65 Click OK button to save current setup. 4.10.2.2 Schedule Snapshot From Main menu->Setting->Storage->Record or on the preview interface, right click mouse and then select record item, you can see Figure 4-66. Select snapshot channel and enable snapshot function. Click Save button. 184 Figure 4-66 From Main menu->Setting->Camera->Encode->Snapshot, you can go to snapshot interface. See Figure 4-67. Select the snapshot channel from the dropdown list and then select snapshot mode as Timing (Schedule) from the dropdown list and then set picture size, quality and snapshot frequency. Figure 4-67 185 In the main menu, from Main menu->Setting->Storage->Schedule, you can go to schedule menu. See Figure 4-63. Here you can set snapshot period. There are total six periods in one day. Please refer to chapter 4.10.2.1 for detailed setup information. The setup steps are general the same. Figure 4-68 Note Please note the trigger snapshot has the higher priority than regular snapshot. If you have enabled these two types at the same time, system can activate the trigger snapshot when an alarm occurs, and otherwise system just operates the regular snapshot. Only the trigger snapshot supports this function. The regular snapshot function can not send out picture via the email. But you can upload the picture to a FTP. 4.10.3 Motion detect record/snapshot 4.10.3.1 Motion detect record a) From Main menu->Setting->Event->Detect, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-69. 186
| 1 | Users Manual-2 | Users Manual | 4.69 MiB |
Figure 4-69 b) Select motion detect from the event type dropdown list. Select a channel from the dropdown list and then check the enable button to enable motion detect function. c) Click Region Select button to set motion detect zone. There are 396(PAL)/330(NTSC) small zones. The green zone is current cursor position. Grey zone is the motion detection zone. Black zone is the disarmed zone. You can click Fn button to switch between the arm mode and disarm mode. In arm mode, you can click the direction buttons to move the green rectangle to set the motion detection zone. After you completed the setup, please click ENTER button to exit current setup. Do remember click save button to save current setup. If you click ESC button to exit the region setup interface system will not save your zone setup. d) Period: Click set button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-92. Here you can set motion detect period. System only enables motion detect operation in the specified periods. It is not for video loss or the tampering. There are two ways for you to set periods. Please note system only supports 6 periods in one day. In Figure 4-92, Select icon of several dates, all checked items can be edited together. Now the icon is shown as
. Click to delete a record type from one period. In Figure 4-92. Click button after one date or a holiday, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-93. There are four record types: regular, motion detection (MD), Alarm, MD & alarm. e) Set sensitivity. Please note the sixth level has the highest sensitivity. f) Click Save button to complete motion detect setup. g) From Main menu->Setting->Storage->-Schedule. See Figure 4-63 h) Set motion detect record channel, period and the record type shall be motion detect (MD). Please refer to chapter 4.10.2. 187 i) Click Copy button to copy current setup to other channel(s). j) Click OK button to complete motion detect record setup. Figure 4-70 Figure 4-71 4.10.3.2 Motion Detect Snapshot a) From Main menu->Setting->Camera->Encode->Snapshot, you can go to snapshot interface. See Figure 4-72. b) In Figure 4-72, select trigger snapshot from the dropdown list and then set picture size, quality and snapshot frequency. Click OK button to save current setup. c) From Main menu->Setting->Event->Detect, here you can select motion detect type, motion detect channel and then check the enable box. Please refer to chapter 4.10.3.1. d) Click OK button to complete motion detect setup. 188 Figure 4-72 4.10.4 Alarm Record/Snapshot 4.10.4.1 Alarm Record a) Before you set alarm setup information, please go to chapter 2.3 to connect alarm input and alarm output cable (such as light, siren and etc). b) The record priority is: Alarm>Motion detect>Regular. In the main menu, from Setting->Event-> Alarm, you can see alarm setup interface. See Figure 4-73. Alarm in: Here is for you to select channel number. Event type: There are four types. Local input/network input/IPC external/IPC offline alarm. Local input alarm: The alarm signal system detects from the alarm input port. Network input alarm: It is the alarm signal from the network. IPC external alarm: It is the on-off alarm signal from the front-end device and can activate the local NVR. IPC offline alarm: Once you select this item, system can generate an alarm when the front -end IPC disconnects with the local NVR. The alarm can activate record, PTZ, snapshot and etc. The alarm can last until the IPC and the NVR connection resumes. Enable: Please you need to highlight this button to enable current function. Type: normal open or normal close. c) Click Save button to complete alarm setup interface. 189 Figure 4-73 d) From Mani menu->Setting->Storage->Schedule, you can go to Figure 4-63. e) Select alarm channel, period and the record type shall be alarm. Please refer to chapter 4.10.2. f) Click Copy button to copy current setup to other channel(s). g) Click OK button to save alarm record information. 4.10.4.2 Alarm Snapshot a) Please refer to Step a) to step c) of chapter 4.10.3.2 to enable timing snapshot. b) From Main menu->Setting->Storage->schedule, you can go to Figure 4-74 to enable snapshot function. c) From Main menu->Setting->Event->Alarm, you can go to Figure 4-73 to set alarm parameter and enable snapshot function. d) Click Save button to save alarm snapshot setup. 190 Figure 4-74 4.10.5 Manual Record/Snapshot You need to have proper rights to implement the following operations. Please make sure the HDD has been properly installed. 4.10.5.1 Manual Record a) Right click mouse and select manual record or in the main menu, from Setting->Storage->Manual Record. Manual record menu is shown as in Figure 4-75. Tips You can click Rec button on the front panel (if possible) to go to the Manual Record interface. 191 Figure 4-75 b) Check the box here to select manual record channel(s). You can see the corresponding indicator light on the front panel is on. Channel: It is to display device all channels. Manual: It has the highest priority. Enable corresponding channel to record no matter what period applied in the record setup. Now system is record general file. Auto: System enables auto record function as you set in chapter 4.10.2 schedule interface
(General/Motion detect/Alarm) Stop: Stop current channel record/Snapshot no matter what period applied in the record setup. All: Check the All box to select all channels. c) Click OK button to complete manual record setup. 4.10.5.2 Manual Snapshot Click button at the preview control bar, you can snapshot 1-5 picture(s). From main menu->Setting->Camera->Encode->Snapshot, you can set snapshot times. You can go to chapter 4.11 to view snapshot picture. 4.10.6 Holiday Record/Snapshot It is for you to set holiday record or snapshot plan. Please note the holiday record/snapshot setup has the higher priority than the ordinary date record/snapshot setup. 4.10.6.1 Holiday Record a) From Mani menu->Setting->System->General, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-76. 192 Figure 4-76 b) Click Add new holiday button, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-77. Here you can set holiday date name, repeat mode, start time/end time and etc. Figure 4-77 c) Click Add button to complete holiday setup. Now you can enable holiday setup and then click Apply button. d) From Main menu->setting->Storage->schedule, you can go to schedule interface. See Figure 193 4-78. Now you can set period and record type of holiday time. Please refer to chapter 4.10.2.1 for detailed setup information. Figure 4-78 e) Click OK button to set holiday record setup. 4.10.6.2 Holiday Snapshot Set Holiday date first. Please refer to step a) to step c) of chapter 4.10.6.1. From Main menu->Setting->Storage->Schedule, you can go to schedule interface. See Figure 4-78. Click Holiday item to set snapshot period. Set holiday snapshot type (Trigger/Regular). Please refer to chapter 4.10.2.2 or chapter 4.10.3.2. 4.10.7 Other Record/Snapshot Motion detect&Alarm record or snapshot, please refer to chapter 4.10.4. Video loss or tampering record or snapshot function, please refer to chapter 4.10.3. 4.11 Playback and Search 4.11.1 Real-time Playback Please refer to chapter 4.7.2 for real-time playback information. 4.11.2 Search Interface From Main menu->Search, or on the preview interface right click mouse and then select search item, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-79. 194 Please refer to the following sheet for more information. Figure 4-79 SN Name 1 Display window 2 Search type Here is to display the searched picture or file. Function Support 1/4/9/16-window playback. (It depends on the product channel amount). Here you can select to search the picture or the recorded file. You can select to play from the read-write HDD, from peripheral device or from redundancy HDD. Before you select to play from the peripheral device, please connect the corresponding peripheral device. You can view all record files of the root directory of the peripheral device. Click the Browse button; you can select the file you want to play. Important Redundancy HDD does not support picture backup function, but it supports picture playback function. You can select to play from redundancy HDD if there are pictures on the redundancy HDD. The blue highlighted date means there is picture or file. Otherwise, there is no 3 Calendar picture or file. In any play mode, click the date you want to see, you can see the Playback 4 mode corresponding record file trace in the time bar. Playback mode1/4/9/16. (It may vary due to different series.) In 1-window playback mode: you can select 1-X channels (X depends on the and product channel amount). 195 channel In 4-window playback mode: you can select 4 channels according to your selection requirement. pane. In 9-window playback mode, you can switch between 1-8, 9-16 and etc channels. In 16-window playback mode, you can switch between1-16, 17-32 and etc channels. The time bar will change once you modify the playback mode or the channel option. Card The card number search interface is shown as below. Here you can view card 5 number number/field setup bar. You can implement advanced search. Current series search product supports this function. 6 7 Face list Mark file list button File list 8 switch button You can search when it is in 1-channel playback mode. Click it, system can filter all human faces and generate human face list. Double click the file; system begins playback the record or image of the corresponding human face. Click it to go to mark file list interface. You can view all mark information of current channel by time. Please refer to chapter 4.11.2.3 for detailed information. Please note only the product of this icon supports mark function. Double click it, you can view the picture/record file list of current day. The file list is to display the first channel of the record file. The system can display max 128 files in one time. Use the and or the mouse to view the file. Select one item, and then double click the mouse or click the ENTER button to playback. You can input the period in the following interface to begin accurate search. File typeRregular record Aexternal alarm recordMMotion detect record. Lock file. Click the file you want to lock and click the button to lock. The file you locked will not be overwritten. Search locked file: Click the button to view the locked file. Play/Pause Return: Click button
, system goes back to the calendar and channel setup There are three ways for you to begin playback. The play button interface.
/
Please note:
Double click the valid period of the time bar. 9 Playback control pane. For the file that is writing or overwriting, it can not be locked. Double click the item in the file list. In slow play mode, click it to switch between play/pause. Stop Backward play
/
In normal play mode, left click the button, the file begins backward play. Click it again to pause current play. In backward play mode, click / to restore normal play. In playback mode, click it to play the next or the previous section. You can click continuously when you are watching the files from the same channel. In normal play mode, when you pause current play, you can click and 196 to begin frame by frame playback. In frame by frame playback mode, click / to restore normal playback. Slow play In playback mode, click it to realize various slow play modes such as slow play 1, slow play 2, and etc. Fast forward In playback mode, click to realize various fast play modes such as fast play 1,fast play 2 and etc. Note: The actual play speed has relationship with the software version. Smart search The volume of the playback Click the snapshot button in the full-screen mode, the system can snapshot 1 picture. System supports custom snap picture saved path. Please connect the peripheral device first, click snap button on the full-screen mode, you can select or create path. Click Start button, the snapshot picture can be saved to the specified path. Mark button. Please note this function is for some series product only. Please make sure there is a mark button in the playback control pane. You can refer to chapter 4.11.2.3 for detailed information. In 1-channel playback mode, click it to enable/disable display IVS rule information on the video. It is to display the record type and its period in current search criteria. In 4-window playback mode, there are corresponding four time bars. In other playback mode, there is only one time bar. Use the mouse to click one point of the color zone in the time bar, system begins playback. The time bar is beginning with 0 o'clock when you are setting the configuration. The time bar zooms in the period of the current playback time when you are playing the file. The green color stands for the regular record file. The red color stands for the external alarm record file. The yellow stands for the motion detect record file. 10 Time bar 11 Time bar unit The option includes:
. The smaller the unit, the larger the zoom rate. You can accurately set the time in the time bar to playback the record. The time bar is beginning with 0 o'clock when you are setting the configuration. The time bar zooms in the period of the current playback time when you are playing the file. 12 Backup Select the file(s) you want to backup from the file list. You can check from the list. Then click the backup button, now you can see the backup menu. System 197 supports customized path setup. After select or create new folder, click the Start button to begin the backup operation. The record file(s) will be saved in the specified folder. Check the file again you can cancel current selection. System max supports to display 32 files from one channel. After you clip on record file, click Backup button you can save it. For one device, if there is a backup in process, you can not start a new backup operation. It is to edit the file. Please click to play the file you want to edit. Select clip start time on the time bar and then Click to start clip. 13 Clip Select clip stop time on the time bar and then click to stop clip. Click
, system pops up file backup dialogue box for you to save. Please note:
Clip function is for one-channel mode/multiple-channel mode. System max supports 1024 files backup at the same time. You can not operate clip operation if there is any file has been checked in the file list. 14 Record type In any play mode, the time bar will change once you modify the search type. 15 16 Other Functions When system is playing, you can select a zone in the window to begin smart search. Click the motion detect button to begin play. Once the motion detect play has begun, click button again will terminate current motion detect file play. Smart There is no motion detect zone by default. search If you select to play other file in the file list, system switches to motion detect play of other file. During the motion detect play process, you can not implement operations such as change time bar, begin backward playback or frame by frame playback. Please refer to chapter 4.11.2.1 Smart Search for detailed operation. Other channel synchroni zation When playing the file, click the number button, system can switch to the same switch to period of the corresponding channel to play. play when playback 198 When the system is in full-screen playback mode, left click the mouse in the screen. Drag your mouse in the screen to select a section and then left click mouse to realize digital zoom. You can right click mouse to exit. 17 Digital zoom Manually switch During the file playback process, you can switch to other channel via the 18 channel dropdown list or rolling the mouse. when This function is null if there is no record file or system is in smart search process. playback Note:
All the operations here (such as playback speed, channel, time and progress) have relationship with hardware version. Some series NVRs do not support some functions or playback speeds. 4.11.2.1 Smart Search During the multiple-channel playback mode, double click one channel and then click the button, system begins smart search. System supports 396(22*18 PAL) and 330(22*15 NTSC) zones. Please left click mouse to select smart search zones. See Figure 4-80. Figure 4-80 Click the
, you can go to the smart search playback. Click it again, system stops smart search playback. Important System does not support motion detect zone setup during the full-screen mode. During the multiple-channel playback, system stops playback of rest channels if you implement one-channel smart search. 4.11.2.2 Accurate playback by time Select records from one day, click the list, you can go to the file list interface. You can input time at the top 199 right corner to search records by time. See image on the left side of the Figure 4-81 For example, input time 11:00.00 and then click Search button
, you can view all the record files after 11:00.00 (The records includes current time.). See image on the right side of the Figure 4-81 Double click a file name to playback. Note After you searched files, system implement accurate playback once you click Play for the first time. System does not support accurate playback for picture. System supports synchronization playback and non-synchronous playback. The synchronization playback supports all channels and non-synchronous playback only supports accurately playback of current select channel. Figure 4-81 4.11.2.3 Mark Playback Please make sure your purchased device support this function. You can use this function only if you can see the mark playback icon on the Search interface (Figure 4-79). When you are playback record, you can mark the record when there is important information. After playback, you can use time or the mark key words to search corresponding record and then play. It is very easy for you to get the important video information. Add Mark When system is playback, click Mark button
, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-82. Playback Mark Figure 4-82 During 1-window playback mode, click mark file list button in Figure 4-79, you can go to mark file list interface. Double click one mark file, you can begin playback from the mark time. Play before mark time 200 Here you can set to begin playback from previous N seconds of the mark time. Note Usually, system can playbacks previous N seconds record if there is such kind of record file. Otherwise, system playbacks from the previous X seconds when there is such as kind of record. Mark Manager Click the mark manager button on the Search interface (Figure 4-79); you can go to Mark Manager interface. See Figure 4-83. System can manage all the record mark information of current channel by default. You can view all mark information of current channel by time. Figure 4-83 Modify Double click one mark information item, you can see system pops up a dialogue box for you to change mark information. You can only change mark name here. Delete Here you can check the mark information item you want to delete and then click Delete button, you can remove one mark item. Note After you go to the mark management interface, system needs to pause current playback. System resume playback after you exit mark management interface. If the mark file you want to playback has been removed, system begin playbacking from the first file in the list. 4.11.3 Picture Playback a) From Main menu->Search, or on the preview interface right click mouse, you can go to Figure 4-79. b) At the top right pane, you can check the box to select picture and then select playback interval. c) Please refer to chapter 4.11.2 to select picture you want to view. 201 4.12 Backup 4.12.1 File Backup In this interface, you can backup record file to the USB device. a) Connect USB burner, USB device or portable HDD and etc to the device. b) From Main menu->Backup, you can go to the Backup interface. See Figure 4-84 Figure 4-84 c) Select backup device and then set channel, file start time and end time. d) Click add button, system begins search. All matched files are listed below. System automatically calculates the capacity needed and remained. See Figure 4-85. e) System only backup files with a before channel name. You can use Fn or cancel button to delete after file serial number. f) Click backup button, you can backup selected files. There is a process bar for you reference. g) When the system completes backup, you can see a dialogue box prompting successful backup. 202 Figure 4-85 h) Click backup button, system begins burning. At the same time, the backup button becomes stop button. You can view the remaining time and process bar at the left bottom. Note During backup process, you can click ESC to exit current interface for other operation (For some series product only). The system will not terminate backup process. The file name format usually is: Channel number+Record type+Time. In the file name, the YDM format is Y+M+D+H+M+S. File extension name is .dav. 4.12.2 Import/Export This function allows you to copy current system configuration to other devices. It also supports import, create new folder, and delete folder and etc function. From Main menu->Setting->System->Import/Export, you can see the configuration file backup interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-86. 203 Figure 4-86 Export: Please connect the peripheral device first and then go to the following interface. Click Export button, you can see there is a corresponding Config_Time folder. Double click the folder, you can view some backup files. Import: Here you can import the configuration files from the peripheral device to current device. You need to select a folder first. You can see a dialogue box asking you to select a folder if you are selecting a file. System pops up a dialogue box if there is no configuration file under current folder. After successfully import, system needs to reboot to activate new setup. Format: Click Format button, system pops up a dialogue box for you to confirm current operation. System begins format process after you click the OK button. Note:
System can not open config backup interface again if there is backup operation in the process. System refreshes device when you go to the config backup every time and set current directory as the root directory of the peripheral device. If you go to the configuration backup interface first and then insert the peripheral device, please click Refresh button to see the newly added device. 4.12.3 Backup Log a) From Main menu->Info->Log, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-87. 204 Figure 4-87 b) Select log type and then set start time/end time, click Search button, you can see log time and event information. Click to view detailed log information. c) Select log items you want to save and then click backup button, you can select a folder to save them. Click Start to backup and you can see the corresponding dialogue box after the process is finish. 4.12.4 USB Device Auto Pop-up After you inserted the USB device, system can auto detect it and pop up the following dialogue box. It allows you to conveniently backup file, log, configuration or update system. See Figure 4-88. Please refer to chapter 4.12.1 file backup, chapter 4.12.3 backup log, chapter 4.12.2 import/export, and chapter 4.11.2 search for detailed information. 205 Figure 4-88 4.13 Alarm 4.13.1 Detect Alarm In the main menu, from Setting to Detect, you can see motion detect interface. See Figure 4-89.There are three detection types: motion detection, video loss, tampering. 4.13.1.1 Motion Detect After analysis video, system can generate a motion detect alarm when the detected moving signal reached the sensitivity you set here. Detection menu is shown as below. See Figure 4-89. Event type: From the dropdown list you can select motion detection type. Channel: Select a channel from the dropdown list to set motion detect function. Enable: Check the box here to enable motion detect function. Region: Click select button, the interface is shown as in Figure 4-90. Here you can set motion detection zone. There are four zones for you to set. Please select a zone first and then left drag the mouse to select a zone. The corresponding color zone displays different detection zone. You can click Fn button to switch between the arm mode and disarm mode. In arm mode, you can click the direction buttons to move the green rectangle to set the motion detection zone. After you completed the setup, please click ENTER button to exit current setup. Do remember click save button to save current setup. If you click ESC button to exit the region setup interface system will not save your zone setup. Sensitivity: System supports 6 levels. The sixth level has the highest sensitivity. Anti-dither: Here you can set anti-dither time. The value ranges from 5 to 600s. The anti-dither time refers to the alarm signal lasts time. It can be seem as the alarm signal activation stays such as the buzzer, tour, PTZ activation, snapshot, channel record. The stay time here does not include the latch time. During the alarm process, the alarm signal can begin an anti-dither time if system detects the local alarm again. The screen prompt, alarm upload, email and etc will not be activated. For example, if you set the anti-dither time as 10 second, you can see the each activation may last 10s if the local alarm is activated. During the process, if system detects another local alarm signal at the fifth second, the buzzer, tour, PTZ activation, snapshot, record channel will begin another 10s while the 206 screen prompt, alarm upload, email will not be activated again. After 10s, if system detects another alarm signal, it can generate an alarm since the anti-dither time is out. Period: Click set button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-92. Here you can set motion detect period. System only enables motion detect operation in the specified periods. It is not for video loss or the tampering. There are two ways for you to set periods. Please note system only supports 6 periods in one day. In Figure 4-92, Select icon of several dates, all checked items can be edited together. Now the icon is shown as
. Click to delete a record type from one period. In Figure 4-92. Click button after one date or a holiday, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-93. There are four record types: regular, motion detection (MD), Alarm, MD & alarm. Alarm output: when an alarm occurs, system enables peripheral alarm devices. Latch: when motion detection complete, system auto delays detecting for a specified time. The value ranges from 1-300(Unit: second) Show message: System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function. Alarm upload: System can upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm centre) if you enabled current function. Send email: System can send out email to alert you when an alarm occurs. Record channel: System auto activates motion detection channel(s) to record once an alarm occurs. Please make sure you have set MD record in Schedule interface(Main Menu->Setting->Schedule) and schedule record in manual record interface(Main Menu->Advanced->Manual Record) PTZ activation: Here you can set PTZ movement when an alarm occurs. Such as go to preset, tour
&pattern when there is an alarm. Click select button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-91 X. Record Delay: System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended. The value ranges from 10s to 300s. Tour: Here you can enable tour function when alarm occurs. System one -window tour. Snapshot: You can enable this function to snapshoot image when a motion detect alarm occurs. Video matrix Check the box here to enable this function. When an alarm occurs, SPOT OUT port displays device video output. It displays video (1-window tour) from alarm activation channel you select at the Record channel item. Buzzer: Highlight the icon to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when alarm occurs. Please highlight icon to select the corresponding function. After all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. Note:
In motion detection mode, you can not use copy/paste to set channel setup since the video in each channel may not be the same. In Figure 4-90, you can left click mouse and then drag it to set a region for motion detection . Click Fn to switch between arm/withdraw motion detection. After setting, click enter button to exit. 207 Figure 4-89 Figure 4-90 208 Figure 4-91 Figure 4-92 209 Motion detect here only has relationship with the sensitivity and region setup. It has no rel ationship Figure 4-93 with other setups. 4.13.1.2 Tampering When someone viciously masks the lens, or the output video is in one -color due to the environments light change, the system can alert you to guarantee video continuity. Tampering interface is shown as in Figure 4-94. You can enable Alarm output or Show message function when tampering alarm occurs. Sensitivity: The value ranges from 1 to 6. It mainly concerns the brightness. The level 6 has the higher sensitivity than level 1. The default setup is 3. Tips:
You can enable preset/tour/pattern activation operation when video loss occurs. Please refer to chapter 4.13.1.1 motion detection for detailed information. Note:
In Detect interface, copy/paste function is only valid for the same type, which means you can not copy a channel setup in video loss mode to tampering mode. About Default function. Since detection channel and detection type may not be the same, system can only restore default setup of current detect type. For example, if you click Default button at the tampering interface, you can only restore default tampering setup. It is null for other detect types. System only enables tampering function during the period you set here. It is null for motion detect or video loss type. 210 Figure 4-94 4.13.1.3 Video Loss In Figure 4-89, select video loss from the type list. You can see the interface is shown as in Figure 4-95. This function allows you to be informed when video loss phenomenon occurred. You can enable alarm output channel and then enable show message function. You can refer to chapter 4.13.1.1Motion detect for detailed information. Tips:
You can enable preset/tour/pattern activation operation when video loss occurs. 211 Figure 4-95 4.13.2 IVS (Optional) Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
From main menu->Setting->Event, you can go to the IVS interface. It includes four interfaces:
Tripwire/intrusion/object/scene. 4.13.2.1 Tripwire Optional Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
System generates an alarm once there is any object crossing the tripwire in the specified direction. From main menu->Setting->Event->IVS->Tripwire, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-96. 212 Check the Enable box to enable tripwire function. Click Rule setup to draw the tripwire. See Figure 4-97. Figure 4-96 Select SN (Line1/2/3/4) and direction, and then input customized rule name. Line1/2/3/4: System supports four tripwires. Each SN stands for one tripwire. Figure 4-97 213 Direction (
/
/
): System can generate an alarm once there is any object crossing in the specified direction. Now you can draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a direct line, curve or polygon. Right click mouse to complete. Click to draw filter object. Select the blue line and then use mouse to adjust zone size. Note Figure 4-98 Each rule can set two sizes (min size/max size). Once the object is smaller than the min size or larger than the max size, there is no alarm. Please make sure the max size is larger than the min size. Click Ok to complete the rule setup. Tips Click to delete the corresponding rule. You can refer to the following information to set other parameters. Channel: Select a channel from the dropdown list to set tripwire function. Enable: Check the box here to enable tripwire function. Rule: input customized rule name here. Period: Click set button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-92. Here you can set tripwire period. System only enables tripwire operation in the specified periods. There are two ways for you to set periods. Please note system only supports 6 periods in one day. In Figure 4-92, Select icon of several dates, all checked items can be edited together. Now 214 the icon is shown as
. Click to delete a record type from one period. In Figure 4-92. Click button after one date or a holiday, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-93. Alarm output: when an alarm occurs, system enables peripheral alarm devices. Latch: when tripwire complete, system auto delays detecting for a specified time. The value ranges from 1-300(Unit: second) Show message: System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function. Alarm upload: System can upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm centre) if you enabled current function. Send email: System can send out email to alert you when an alarm occurs. Record channel: System auto activates tripwire channel(s) to record once an alarm occurs. Please make sure you have set intelligent record in Schedule interface(Main Menu->Setting->Schedule) and schedule record in manual record interface(Main Menu->Advanced->Manual Record) PTZ activation: Here you can set PTZ movement when an alarm occurs. Such as go to preset, tour
&pattern when there is an alarm. Click select button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-91 X. Record Delay: System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended. The value ranges from 10s to 300s. Tour: Here you can enable tour function when an alarm occurs. System one-window tour. Snapshot: You can enable this function to snapshot image when a motion detect alarm occurs. Buzzer: Highlight the icon to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs. Figure 4-99 215 Figure 4-100 Figure 4-101 4.13.2.2 Intrusion (Cross warning zone) Optional Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
System generates an alarm once there is any object entering or exiting the zone in the specified direction. From main menu->Setting->Event->IVS->Intrusion, the intrusion interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-102. 216 Check the enable box to enable intrusion function. Click Rule setup to draw the zone. See Figure 4-103. Figure 4-102 Figure 4-103 Select SN (Area1/2/3/4) and direction, and then input customized rule name. Area1/2/3/4: System supports four zones. Each SN stands for one zone. Direction (
/
/
): System can generate an alarm once there is any object enter/exit (Or both) the zone. Now you can draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a line first and then right click mouse to draw another line until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse to exit. Click Ok to complete the rule setup. Tips 217 Click to delete the corresponding rule. You can refer to the chapter 4.13.2.1 to set parameters. 4.13.2.3 Object Detect Optional Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
For the same channel, the object detect and the intrusion can not be valid at the same time. System generates an alarm when the object missing/abandoned object alarm occurs. From main menu->Setting->Event->IVS->Object, the object interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-104. Check the enable box to enable object detect function. Click Rule setup to draw the rule. Figure 4-104 Figure 4-105 218 Select SN (object1/2/3/4) and direction, and then input customized rule name. Object1/2/3/4: System supports four zones. Each SN stands for one zone. Direction (
/
): For icon
, system can generate an alarm once the object left in the one for the specified time.. For icon
, system can generate an alarm once the object is out of the zone for the specified time. Period: It refers to the object in/out the zone time. Now you can draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a line, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse. Click Ok to complete the rule setup. Tips Click to delete the corresponding rule. You can refer to the chapter 4.13.2.1 to set parameters. 4.13.2.4 Scene Change Optional Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
When the detected scene changes, system can generate an alarm. From main menu->Setting->Event->IVS->Scene change, the interface is shown as in Figure 4-106. You can refer to the chapter 4.13.2.1 to set parameters. Figure 4-106 219 4.13.3 Face Detect (Optional) Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
When camera detects human face, system can generate an alarm. From main menu->Setting->Event->Face detect, the interface is shown as in Figure 4-107. Face ROI: Check the box here, system can enhance the human face display pane. Log: Check the box here, system can record face detect log. You can refer to the chapter 4.13.2.1 t to set other parameters. 4.13.4 Audio Detect (Optional) Figure 4-107 Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
System can generate an alarm once it detect the audio input is abnormal or audio volume changes. From main menu->Setting->Event->Audio detect, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-108. Input abnormal: Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio input is abnormal. Intensity change: Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio volume becomes strong. Sensitivity: It refers to the audio recognition sensitivity. The higher the value is, the higher the sensitivity is. 220 Threshold: It is to set intensity change threshold. The smaller the value is, the higher the sensitivity is. Log: Check the box here, system can record audio detect alarm log. You can refer to the chapter 4.13.2.1 t to set other parameters. Figure 4-108 4.13.5 Alarm output From Main menu->Setting->Event->Alarm output, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-109. Here is for you to set proper alarm output (Auto/manual/stop). Click OK button of the alarm reset, you can clear all alarm output status. 221 Figure 4-109 Please highlight icon to select the corresponding alarm output. After all the setups please click OK button, system goes back to the previous menu. 4.13.6 Alarm Setup In the main menu, from Setting->Event->Alarm, you can see alarm setup interface. Alarm in: Here is for you to select channel number. In the main menu, from Setting->Event->Alarm, you can see alarm setup interface. See Figure 4-110. There are four alarm types. See Figure 4-110 to Figure 4-113. Local alarm: The alarm signal system detects from the alarm input port. Network alarm: It is the alarm signal from the network. IPC external alarm: It is the on-off alarm signal from the front-end device and can activate the local HNVR. IPC offline alarm: Once you select this item, system can generate an alarm when the front -end IPC disconnects with the local HNVR. The alarm can activate record, PTZ, snap and etc. The alarm can last until the IPC and the HNVR connection resumes. Important If it is your first time to boot up the device, the disconnection status of the front -end network camera will not be regarded as offline. After one successfully connection, all the disconnection events will be regarded as IPC offline event. When IPC offline alarm occurs, the record and snapshot function of digital channel is null. Enable: Please you need to highlight this button to enable current function. Type: normal open or normal close. Period: Click set button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 4-115. There are two ways for you to set periods. There are max 6 periods in one day. There are four record types: regular, motion detection (MD), Alarm, MD & alarm. In Figure 4-115, Select icon of several dates, all checked items can be edited together. Now the icon is shown as
. Click to delete a record type from one period. In Figure 4-115. Click button as in Figure 4-116. There are four record types: regular, motion detection (MD), Alarm, MD &
after one date or a holiday, you can see an interface shown alarm. PTZ activation: When an alarm occurred, system can activate the PTZ operation. The PTZ activation lasts an anti-dither period. See Figure 4-114. Anti-dither: Here you can set anti-dither time. The value ranges from 5 to 600s. The anti-dither time refers to the alarm signal lasts time. It can be seem as the alarm signal activation stays such as the buzzer, tour, PTZ activation, snapshot, channel record. The stay time here does not include the latch time. During the alarm process, the alarm signal can begin an anti-dither time if system detects the local alarm again. The screen prompt, alarm upload, email and etc will not be activated. For example, if you set the anti-dither time as 10 second, you can see the each activation may last 10s if the local alarm is activated. During the process, if system detects another l ocal alarm signal at the fifth second, the buzzer, tour, PTZ activation, snapshot, record channel will begin another 10s while the 222 screen prompt, alarm upload, email will not be activated again. After 10s, if system detects another alarm signal, it can generate an alarm since the anti-dither time is out. Alarm output: The number here is the device alarm output port. You can select the corresponding ports(s) so that system can activate the corresponding alarm device(s) when an alarm occurred. Latch: When the anti-dither time ended, the channel alarm you select in the alarm output may last the specified period. The value ranges from 1 to 300 seconds. This function is not for other alarm activation operations. The latch is still valid even you disable the alarm event function directly. Show message: System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function. Alarm upload: System can upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm centre and the WEB) if you enabled current function. System only uploads the alarm channel status. You can go to the WEB and then go to the Alarm interface to set alarm event and alarm operation. Please go to the Network interface to set alarm centre information. Send email: System can send out the alarm signal via the email to alert you when alarm occurs. Once you enable the snap function, system can also send out an image as the attachment. Please go to the Main Menu->Setting ->Network->Email interface to set. Record channel: you can select proper channel to record alarm video (Multiple choices). You need to set alarm record mode as Schedule in Record interface (Main Menu->Advanced->Record). Please note the manual record has the highest priority. System record all the time no matter there is an alarm or not if you select Manual mode. Now you can go to the Schedule interface (Main Menu->Setting->Schedule) to set the record type, corresponding channel number, week and date. You can select the record type:Regular/MD/Alarm/MD&Alarm. Please note, you can not select the MD&Alarm and MD(or Alarm) at the same time. Now you can go to the Encode interface to select the alarm record and set the encode parameter (Main Menu->Setting->Encode). Finally, you can set the alarm input as the local alarm and then select the record channel. The select channel begins alarm record when an alarm occurred. Please note system begins the alarm record instead of the MD record if the local alarm and MD event occurred at the same time. Tour: Here you can enable tour function when an alarm occurs. System supports 1/8-window tour. Please go to chapter4.7.4.2 Display for tour interval setup. Please note the tour setup here has higher priority than the tour setup you set in the Display interface. Once there two tours are both enabled, system can enable the alarm tour as you set here when an alarm occurred. If there is no alarm, system implements the tour setup in the Display interface. Snapshot: You can enable this function to snapshoot image when an alarm occurs. Buzzer: Highlight the icon to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs. 223 Figure 4-110 Figure 4-111 224 Figure 4-112
. Figure 4-113 225 Figure 4-114 Figure 4-115 226 Figure 4-116 Please highlight icon to select the corresponding function. After setting all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. 4.13.7 Abnormality There are two types: Disk/Network. Disk: Disk error, no disk, no space. See Figure 4-117 and Figure 4-118. Network: Disconnection, IP conflict, MAC conflict. See Figure 4-119. Alarm output: Please select alarm activation output port (multiple choices). Less than: System can alarm you when the HDD space is less than the threshold you set here
(For HDD no space type only). Latch: Here you can set corresponding delaying time. The value ranges from 1s-300s. System automatically delays specified seconds in turning off alarm and activated output after external alarm cancelled. Show message: system can pop up the message in the local screen to alert you when alarm occurs. Alarm upload: System can upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm centre) if you enabled current function. For disconnection event, IP conflict event and MAC conflict event, this function is null. Send email: System can send out email to alert you when alarm occurs. Buzzer: Highlight the icon to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs. 227 Figure 4-117 Figure 4-118 228 Figure 4-119 4.14 Network 4.14.1.1 TCP/IP The single network adapter interface is shown as in Figure 4-120 and the dual network adapters interface is shown as in Figure 4-121. Network Mode : Includes multiple access, fault tolerance, and load balancing Multiple-address mode: eth0 and eth1 operate separately. You can use the services such as HTTP, RTP service via etho0 or the eth1. Usually you need to set one default card (default setup is etho) to request the auto network service form the device-end such as DHCP, email, FTP and etc. In multiple-address mode, system network status is shown as offline once one card is offline. Network fault-tolerance: In this mode, device uses bond0 to communicate with the external devices. You can focus on one host IP address. At the same time, you need to set one master card. Usually there is only one running card (master card).System can enable alt ernate card when the master card is malfunction. The system is shown as offline once these two cards are both offline. Please note these two cards shall be in the same LAN. Load balance: In this mode, device uses bond0 to communicate with the external devi ce. The eth0 and eth1 are both working now and bearing the network load. Their network load are general the same. The system is shown as offline once these two cards are both offline. Please note these two cards shall be in the same LAN. Default Network Card: Please select eth0/eth1/bond0(optional) after enable multiple-access function Main Network Card: Please select eth0/eth1 (optional).after enable multiple access function. Note: The dual-Ethernet port series support the above three configurations and supports functions as multiple-access, fault-tolerance and load balancing. 229 IP Version: There are two options: IPv4 and IPv6. Right now, system supports these two IP address format and you can access via them. MAC address: The host in the LAN can get a unique MAC address. It is for you to access in the LAN. It is read-only. IP address: Here you can use up/down button () or input the corresponding number to input IP address. Then you can set the corresponding subnet mask the default gateway. Default gateway: Here you can input the default gateway. Please note system needs to check the validity of all IPv6 addresses. The IP address and the default gateway shall be in the same IP section. That is to say, the specified length of the subnet prefix shall have the same string. DHCP: It is to auto search IP. When enable DHCP function, you can not modify IP/Subnet mask
/Gateway. These values are from DHCP function. If you have not enabled DHCP function, IP/Subnet mask/Gateway display as zero. You need to disable DHCP function to view current IP information. Besides, when PPPoE is operating, you can not modify IP/Subnet mask /Gateway. MTU: It is to set MTU value of the network adapter. The value ranges from 1280 -7200 bytes. The default setup is 1500 bytes. Please note MTU modification may result in network adapter reboot and network becomes off. That is to say, MTU modification can affect current network service. System may pop up dialog box for you to confirm setup when you want to change MTU setup. Click OK button to confirm current reboot, or you can click Cancel button to terminate current modification. Before the modification, you can check the MTU of the gateway; the MTU of the NVR shall be the same as or is lower than the MTU of the gateway. In this way, you can reduce packets and enhance network transmission efficiency. The following MTU value is for reference only. 1500: Ethernet information packet max value and it is also the default value. It is the typical setup when there is no PPPoE or VPN. It is the default setup of some router, switch or the network adapter. 1492: Recommend value for PPPoE. 1468: Recommend value for DHCP. Preferred DNS server: DNS server IP address. Alternate DNS server: DNS server alternate address. Transfer mode: Here you can select the priority between fluency/video qualities. LAN download: System can process the downloaded data first if you enable this function. The download speed is 1.5X or 2.0X of the normal speed. LAN download: System can process the downloaded data first if you enable this function. The download speed is 1.5X or 2.0X of the normal speed. After completing all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. 230 Figure 4-120 4.14.1.2 Connection The connection setup interface is shown as in Figure 4-122. Figure 4-121 Max connection: system support maximal 128 users. 0 means there is no connection limit. TCP port: Default value is 37777. 231 UDP port: Default value is 37778. HTTP port: Default value is 80. HTTPS port: Default value is 443. RTSP port: Default value is 554. Important: System needs to reboot after you changed and saved any setup of the above four ports. Please make sure the port values here do not conflict. Figure 4-122 4.14.1.3 WIFI AP Note This function is for some series product only. 4.14.1.3.1 WIFI AP The WIFI AP interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-123. Here you can set WIFI hotspot, so that the network camera can use the hotspot to connect to the network. 2.4GHz/5GHz: Please check the box to enable the function. SSID: It is to set SSID name. You can use this name to search the device. Password: It is to set SSID password. You can use this password to connect to the network. Security: Select authentication mode from the dropdown list. Channel: Please select a channel from the dropdown list. The default setup is auto. Mode: There three options: high/middle/low. Please select from the dropdown list. 232 Figure 4-123 4.14.1.3.2 Advanced Click Advanced, you can see an interface shown as below. See Figure 4-124. IPv4 address: Input WIFI AP IP address. IPv4 netmask: Input WIFI AP network mask. IPv4 gateway: Input WIFI AP gateway. Start IP/End IP: Input start IP and end IP of the network cameras. The NVR can allocate the IP addresses in the range you specified here. Upgrade: Click it to upgrade WIFI AP module. 233 Figure 4-124 4.14.1.4 WIFI The WIFI interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-125. Enable: Check the box here to enable WIFI function. Refresh: You can click it to search the hotspot list again. It can automatically add the information such as the password if you have set it before. Disconnect: Here you can click it to turn off the connection. Connect: Here you can click it to connect to the hotspot. System needs to turn off current connection and then connect to a new hotspot if there is connection of you selected one. 234 Figure 4-125 WIFI working status: Here you can view current connection status. Please note:
After successful connection, you can see WIFI connection icon at the top right corner of the preview interface. When the hotspot verification type is WEP, system displays as AUTO since the device can not detect its encryption type. System does not support verification type WPA and WPA2. The display may become abnormal for the verification type and encryption type. After device successfully connected to the WIFI, you can view the hotspot name, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and etc. Right now system support TOTOLINK_N2200UP module. 4.14.1.5 3G 3G setup interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-126. Please refer to the following contents for the parameter information. Pane 1: Display 3G signal intensity after you enabled 3G function. Pane 2: Display 3G module configuration information after you enabled 3G function. Pane 3: Display 3G module status information after you enabled 3G function. It is to display current wireless network signal intensity such as EVDO, CDMA1x, WCDMA, WCDMA, EDGE and etc. 3G module: It is to display current wireless network adapter name. 3G Enable/Disable: Check the box here to enable 3G module. Network type: There are various network types for different 3G network modules. You can select according to your requirements. 235 APN: It is the wireless connection server. It is to set you access the wireless network via which method. AUTH: It is the authentication mode. It supports PAP/CHAP. Dial number: Please input 3G network dialup number you got from your ISP. User name: It is the user name for you to login the 3G network. Password: It is the password for you to login the 3G network. Pulse interval: You can set dialup duration. Once you disable the extra stream, the connection time begins. For example, if you input 5 seconds here, then 3G network connection period is 5 seconds. The device automatically disconnect when time is up. If there is no extra stream, 3G network connection is valid all the time. If the alive time is 0, then the 3G network connection is valid all the time. Dial: Here you can enable or disable 3G network connection/disconnection manually. 3G wireless network: Here is to display wireless network status, SIM card status, dial status. If the 3G connection is OK, then you can see the device IP address the wireless network automatically allocates. 1 2 3 4.14.1.6 PPPoE Figure 4-126 PPPoE interface is shown as in Figure 4-127. Input PPPoE name and PPPoE password you get from your ISP (Internet service provider). Click save button, you need to restart to activate your configuration. After rebooting, NVR will connect to internet automatically. The IP in the PPPoE is the NVR dynamic value. You can access this IP to visit the unit. 236 Figure 4-127 4.14.1.7 DDNS DDNS setup interface is shown as in Figure 4-128. You need a PC of fixed IP in the internet and there is the DDNS software running in this PC. In other words, this PC is a DNS (domain name server). In network DDNS, please select DDNS type and highlight enable item. And them please input your PPPoE name you get from you IPS and server IP (PC with DDNS). Click save button and then reboot system. Click save button, system prompts for rebooting to get all setup activated. After rebooting, open IE and input as below:
http//(DDNS server IP)/(virtual directory name)/webtest.htm e.g.: http//10.6.2.85/NVR _DDNS/webtest.htm.) Now you can open DDNSServer web search page. 237 Figure 4-128 Please note DDNS type includes: CN99 DDNS, NO-IP DDNS, Quick DDNS, Dyndns DDNS and sysdns DDNS. All the DDNS can be valid at the same time, you can select as you requirement. Private DDNS function shall work with special DDNS server and special Professional Surveillance Software (PSS). Dahua DDNS and Client-end Introduction 1) Background Introduction Device IP is not fixed if you use ADSL to login the network. The DDNS function allows you to access the NVR via the registered domain name. Besides the general DDNS, the Dahua DDNS works with the device from the manufacturer so that it can add the extension function. 2) Function Introduction The Dahua DDNS client has the same function as other DDNS client end. It realizes the bonding of the domain name and the IP address. Right now, current DDNS server is for our own devices only. You need to refresh the bonding relationship of the domain and the IP regularly. There is no user name, password or the ID registration on the server. At the same time, each device has a default domain name (Generated by MAC address) for your option. You can also use customized valid domain name (has not registered.). 3) Operation Before you use Dahua DDNS, you need to enable this service and set proper server address, port value and domain name. Server addresswww.dahuaddns.com Port number80 Domain nameThere are two modes: Default domain name and customized domain name. Except default domain name registration, you can also use customized domain name (You can input your self-defined domain name.) After successful registration, you can use domain name to login installed of 238 the device IP. User name: It is optional. You can input your commonly used email address. Important Do not register frequently. The interval between two registrations shall be more than 60 seconds. Too many registration requests may result in server attack. System may take back the domain name that is idle for one year. You can get a notification email before the cancel operation if your email address setup is OK. 4.14.1.8 UPnP The UPNP protocol is to establish a mapping relationship between the LAN and the WAN. Please input the router IP address in the LAN in Figure 4-120. See Figure 4-129. UPNP on/off Turn on or off the UPNP function of the device. Status: When the UPNP is offline, it shows as Unknown. When the UPNP works it shows Success Router LAN IP: It is the router IP in the LAN. WAN IP: It is the router IP in the WAN. Port Mapping list The port mapping list here is the one to one relationship with the routers port mapping setting. List Service nameDefined by user. Protocol Protocol type Internal portPort that has been mapped in the router. External portPort that has been mapped locally. Default: UPNP default port setting is the HTTP, TCP and UDP of the NVR. Add to the list: Click it to add the mapping relationship. Delete: Click it to remove one mapping item. Double click one item; you can change the corresponding mapping information. See Figure 4-130. Important:
When you are setting the router external port, please use 1024~5000 port. Do not use well-known port 1~255 and the system port 256~1023 to avoid conflict. For the TCP and UDP, please make sure the internal port and external port are the same to guarantee the proper data transmission. 239 Figure 4-129 Figure 4-130 4.14.1.9 IP Filter IP filter interface is shown as in Figure 4-131. You can add IP in the following list. The list supports max 64 IP addresses. System supports valid address of IPv4 and IPv6. Please note system needs to check the validity of all IPv6 addresses and implement optimization. After you enabled trusted sites function, only the IP listed below can access current NVR. If you enable blocked sites function, the following listed IP addresses can not access current NVR. Enable: Highlight the box here, you can check the trusted site function and blocked sites function. You can not see these two modes if the Enable button is grey. 240 Type: You can select trusted site and blacklist from the dropdown list. You can view the IP address on the following column. Start address/end address: Select one type from the dropdown list, you can input IP address in the start address and end address. Now you can click Add IP address or Add IP section to add. a) For the newly added IP address, it is in enable status by default. Remove the before the item, and then current item is not in the list. b) System max supports 64 items. c) Address column supports IPv4 or IPv6 format. If it is IPv6 address, system can optimize it. For example, system can optimize aa:0000: 00: 00aa: 00aa: 00aa: 00aa: 00aa as aa:: aa: aa: aa: aa:
aa: aa. d) System automatically removes space if there is any space before or after the newly added IP address. e) System only checks start address if you add IP address. System check start address and end address if you add IP section and the end address shall be larger than the start address. f) System may check newly added IP address exists or not. System does not add if input IP address does not exist. Delete: Click it to remove specified item. Edit: Click it to edit start address and end address. See Figure 4-132. System can check the IP address validity after the edit operation and implement IPv6 optimization. Default: Click it to restore default setup. In this case, the trusted sites and blocked s ites are both null. Note:
If you enabled trusted sites, only the IP in the trusted sites list can access the device. If you enabled blocked sites, the IP in the blocked sites can not access the device. System supports add MAC address. Figure 4-131 241 Figure 4-132 4.14.1.10 Email The email interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-133. SMTP server: Please input your email SMTP server IP here. Port: Please input corresponding port value here. User name: Please input the user name to login the sender email box. Password: Please input the corresponding password here. Sender: Please input sender email box here. Title: Please input email subject here. System support English character and Arabic number. Max 32-digit. Receiver: Please input receiver email address here. System max supports 3 email boxes. System automatically filters same addresses if you input one receiver repeatedly. SSL enable: System supports SSL encryption box. Interval: The send interval ranges from 0 to 3600 seconds. 0 means there is no interval. Health email enable: Please check the box here to enable this function. This function allows the system to send out the test email to check the connection is OK or not. Interval: Please check the above box to enable this function and then set the corresponding interval. System can send out the email regularly as you set here. Click the Test button, you can see the corresponding dialogue box to see the email connection is OK or not. Please note system will not send out the email immediately when the alarm occurs. When the alarm, motion detection or the abnormity event activates the email, system sends out the email according to the interval you specified here. This function is very useful when there are too many emails activated by the abnormity events, which may result in heavy load for the email server. 242 Figure 4-133 4.14.1.11 FTP You need to download or buy FTP service tool (such as Ser-U FTP SERVER) to establish FTP service. Please install Ser-U FTP SERVER first. From start -> program -> Serv-U FTP Server -> Serv-U Administrator. Now you can set user password and FTP folder. Please note you need to grant write right to FTP upload user. See Figure 4-134. Figure 4-134 You can use a PC or FTP login tool to test setup is right or not. For example, you can login user ZHY to H140H 140H 140HTUFTP://10.10.7.7UTH and then test it can modify or delete folder 243 or not. See Figure 4-135. Figure 4-135 System also supports upload multiple NVRs to one FTP server. You can create multiple folders under this FTP. FTP interface is shown as in Figure 4-136. Please highlight the icon in front of Enable to activate FTP function. Here you can input FTP server address, port and remote directory. When remote directory is null, system automatically create folders according to the IP, time and channel. User name and password is the account information for you to login the FTP. File length is upload file length. When setup is larger than the actual file length, system will upload the whole file. When setup here is smaller than the actual file length, system only uploads the set length and auto ignore the left section. When interval value is 0, system uploads all corresponding files. After completed channel and weekday setup, you can set two periods for one each channel. Click the Test button, you can see the corresponding dialogue box to see the FTP connection is OK or not. Figure 4-136 244 4.14.1.12 SNMP SNMP is an abbreviation of Simple Network Management Protocol. It provides the basic network management frame of the network management system. The SNMP widely used in many environments. It is used in many network device, software and system. You can set in the following interface. See Figure 4-137. Figure 4-137 Please enable the SNMP function. Use the corresponding software tool (MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser. You still need two MIB file: BASE-SNMP-MIB, NVR-SNMP-MIB) to connect to the device. You can get the device corresponding configuration information after successfully connection. Please follow the steps listed below to configure. In Figure 4-137, check the box to enable the SNMP function. Input the IP address of the PC than is running the software in the Trap address. You can use default setup for the rest items. Compile the above mentioned two MIB file via the software MIB Builder. Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load the file from the previous step to the software. Input the device IP you want to manage in the MG-SOFT MIB Browser. Please set the corresponding version for your future reference. Open the tree list on the MG-SOFT MIB Browser; you can get the device configuration. Here you can see the device has how many video channels, audio channels, application version and etc. Note Port conflict occurs when SNMP port and Trap port are the same. 4.14.1.13 Multicast Multicast setup interface is shown as in Figure 4-138. 245 Here you can set a multiple cast group. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 4-138 IP multiple cast group address
-224.0.0.0-239.255.255.255
-D address space The higher four-bit of the first byte=1110 Reserved local multiple cast group address
-224.0.0.0-224.0.0.255
-TTL=1 When sending out telegraph
-For example 224.0.0.1 All systems in the sub-net 224.0.0.2 All routers in the sub-net 224.0.0.4 DVMRP router 224.0.0.5 OSPF router 224.0.0.13 PIMv2 router Administrative scoped addressees
-239.0.0.0-239.255.255.255
-Private address space Like the single broadcast address of RFC1918 Can not be used in Internet transmission Used for multiple cast broadcast in limited space. Except the above mentioned addresses of special meaning, you can use other addresses. For example:
Multiple cast IP: 235.8.8.36 Multiple cast PORT: 3666. 246 After you logged in the Web, the Web can automatically get multiple cast address and add it to the multiple cast groups. You can enable real-time monitor function to view the view. Please note multiple cast function applies to special series only. 4.14.1.14 Alarm Centre This interface is reserved for you to develop. See Figure 4-139. Figure 4-139 4.14.1.15 Auto register This function allows the device to auto register to the proxy you specified. In this way, you can use the client-end to access the NVR and etc via the proxy. Here the proxy has a switch function. In the network service, device supports the server address of IPv4 or domain. Please follow the steps listed below to use this function. Please set proxy server address, port, and sub-device name at the device-end. Please enable the auto register function, the device can auto register to the proxy server. 1) The setup interface is shown as in Figure 4-140. Important Do not input network default port such as TCP port number. 247 Figure 4-140 2) The proxy server software developed from the SDK. Please open the software and input the global setup. Please make sure the auto connection port here is the same as the port you set in the previous step. 3) Now you can add device. Please do not input default port number such as the TCP port in the mapping port number. The device ID here shall be the same with the ID you input in Figure 4-140. Click Add button to complete the setup. 4) Now you can boot up the proxy server. When you see the network status is Y, it means your registration is OK. You can view the proxy server when the device is online. Important The server IP address can also be domain. But you need to register a domain name before you run proxy device server. 4.14.1.16 P2P You can use your cell phone to scan the QR code and add it to the cell phone client. Via the SN from scanning the QR code, you can access the device in the WAN. Please refer to the P2P operation manual included in the resources CD. From main menu->Setting->Network->P2P, you can go to the following interface, the P2P interface is shown as in Figure 4-141. 248 Figure 4-141 Android:
Open Google Play app in your smart phone. Search gDMSS Lite or gDMSS Plus, download it and install. iOS:
Open App Store app in your smart phone. Search iDMSS Lite or iDMSS Plus, download it and install. Please follow the steps listed below. Open App; tap to go to the Liv preview. Tap at the top left corner, you can see the main menu. Tap Device manager button, you can use several modes (P2P/DDNS/IP and etc) to add the device. Click to save current setup. Tap Start Live preview to view all-channel video from the connected device. See Figure 4-142. 249 Figure 4-142 4.14.1.17 Easy Space This function allows you to upload motion detect record or snapshot image to the dropbox and etc. The easy space interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-143. Please select the easy space address from the dropdown list and then input corresponding user name and password. Figure 4-143 250 Note The uploaded file is for sub stream only. Please go to record control interface (main stream->setting->Storage->Record) and then select sub stream. The easy space function uses upload bandwidth. Usually the recommended upload bandwidth shall be more than 512kbps and please make sure the network is stable. The easy space upload data adopts safe SSL encryption connection. Please enable 1-channel to upload in case this function occupies too much CPU. 4.14.1.18 SWITCH It is for you to set IP address, subnet mask, gateway and etc of the Switch. See Figure 4-144. Figure 4-144 4.14.2 Network Test In this interface, you can see network test and network load information. 4.14.2.1 Network Test From main menu->Info-Network->Test, the network test interface is shown as in Figure 4-145. Destination IP: Please input valid IPV4 address and domain name. Test: Click it to test the connection with the destination IP address. The test results can display average delay and packet loss rate and you can also view the network status as OK, bad, no connection and etc. Network Sniffer backup: Please insert USB2.0 device and click the Refresh button, you can view the device on the following column. You can use the dropdown list to select peripheral device. Click Browse button to select the snap path. The steps here are same as preview backup operation. 251 You can view all connected network adapter names (including Ethernet, PPPoE, WIFI, and 3G), you can click the button on the right panel to begin Sniffer. Click the grey stop button to stop. Please note system can not Sniffer several network adapters at the same time. After Sniffer began, you can exit to implement corresponding network operation such as login WEB, monitor. Please go back to Sniffer interface to click stop Sniffer. System can save the packets to the specified path. The file is named after Network adapter name+time. You can use software such as Wireshark to open the packets on the PC for the professional engineer to solve complicated problems. Figure 4-145 4.14.2.2 Network Load From main menu->Info-Network->Load, network load is shown as in Figure 4-146. Here you can view the follow statistics of the device network adapter. Here you can view information of all connected network adapters. The connection status is shown as offline if connection is disconnected. Click one network adapter, you can view the flow statistics such as send rate and receive rate at the top panel 252 Figure 4-146 4.15 HDD Setup Here you can view HDD information such as type, status, total capacity, record time and etc. The operation includes format, resume from error, change HDD property (Read write, Read-only). Here you can also set alarm and HDD storage position. 4.15.1 Format a) From Mani-menu->Setting->Storage->HDD Manager, you can go to HDD management interface. See Figure 4-147. 253 Figure 4-147 b) Select a HDD and then select format from the dropdown list. Click Execute button. c) Click OK button to complete the setup. You can see system needs to restart to activate current setup. 4.15.2 HDD Information Here is to list hard disk type, total space, free space, and status. See Figure 4-148. means current HDD is normal.. - means there is no HDD. If disk is damaged, system shows as ?. Please remove the broken hard disk before you add a new one. 254 Figure 4-148 In Figure 4-148, click one HDD item, the S.M.A.R.T interface is shown as in Figure 4-149. Figure 4-149 255 Parameter Function SATA 1 here means there is 1 HDD. For different series product, the max HDD amount may vary, When HDD is working properly, system is shown as O. _ means there is no HDD. SN You can view the HDD amount the device connected to;
means the second HDD is current working HDD. Type The corresponding HDD property. Total space The HDD total capacity. Free space The HDD free capacity. Status HDD can work properly or not. Bad track Display there is bad track or not. Page up Click it to view previous page. Page down Click it to view the next page. View Click it to view HDD record information (file start time and end time). recording time View type HDD Click it to view HDD property, status and etc, and capability 4.15.3 Advanced It is to set HDD group, and HDD group setup for main stream, sub stream and snapshot operation Important HDD group and quota mode can not be valid at the same time. System needs to restart once you change the mode here. The HDD group mode is shown as in Figure 4-150. HDD: Here you can view the HDD amount the device can support. Group: It lists the HDD Group number of current hard disk. 256 Figure 4-150 Please select the correspond group from the dropdown list and then click Apply button. Click main stream/sub stream/snapshot button to set corresponding HDD group information. See Figure 4-151 through Figure 4-153. Figure 4-151 257 Figure 4-152 Figure 4-153 4.15.4 HDD Detect Note This function is for some series product only. The HDD detect function is to detect HDD current status so that you can clearly understand the HDD performance and replace the malfunction HDD. 258 There are two detect types:
Quick detect is to detect via the universal system files. System can quickly complete the HDD scan. If you want to use this function, please make sure the HDD is in use now. If the HDD is removed from other device, please make sure the write-data once was full after it installed on current device. Global detect adopts Windows mode to scan. It may take a long time and may affect the HDD that is recording. 4.15.4.1 Manual Detect From main menu->Setting->Storage->HDD Detect->Manual Detect, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-154. Please select detect type and HDD. Click start detect to begin. You can view the corresponding detect information. Figure 4-154 4.15.4.2 Detect Report After the detect operation, you can go to the detect report to view corresponding information. From main menu->Setting->Storage->HDD Detect->Manual Detect, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-155. 259 Figure 4-155 Click View, you can see the detailed information such as detect result, backup and S.M.A.R.T. See Figure 4-156 and Figure 4-157. Figure 4-156 260 Figure 4-157 4.15.5 RAID Manager Important Please make sure your purchased product support the RAID function, otherwise you can not see the following interface. Right now, RAID supports Raid0, Raid1, Raid5, Raid6, and Raid10. Local hotspare supports Raid1, Raid5, Raid6, and Raid10. 4.15.5.1 RAID Config It is for you to manage RAID HDD. It can display RAID name, type, free space, total space, status and etc. Here you can add/delete RAID HDD. Click Add button to select RAID type and then select HDDs, click OK button to add. See Figure 4-158. 261 Figure 4-158 4.15.5.2 Hotspare disks Click Hotspare disks tab name, you can add the hot spare HDD. See Figure 4-159. The type includes two options:
Global: It is global hotspare disk. When any RAID becomes degrading, it can replace and build the RAID. Local: It is local hotspare disk. When the specified RAID becomes degrading, it can replace and build the RAID. Select a hot spare device and then click Delete button. Click Apply button to delete. 262 Figure 4-159 4.16 Basic Setups Set NVR basic setup, device setup and other setups. 4.16.1 Device Setup From Main menu->Setting->System->General, you can go to the general interface. See Figure 4-161. Pack duration: Here is for you to specify record duration. The value ranges from 0 to 120 minutes. Default value is 60 minutes. Device ID: Please input a corresponding device name here. Device No: When you are using one remote control (not included in the accessory bag) to control several NVRs, you can give a name to each NVR for your management. Language: System supports various languages: Chinese (simplified), Chinese (Traditional), English, Italian, Japanese, French, Spanish (All languages listed here are optional. Slight difference maybe found in various series.) Video standard: There are two formats: NTSC and PAL. HDD full: Here is for you to select working mode when hard disk is full. There are two options: stop recording or rewrite. If current working HDD is overwritten or the current HDD is full whi le the next HDD is no empty, then system stops recording, If the current HDD is full and then next HDD is not empty, then system overwrites the previous files. Pack duration: Here is for you to specify record duration. The value ranges from 1 to 120 minute s. Default value is 60 minutes. Realtime play: It is to set playback time you can view in the preview interface. The value ranges from 5 to 60 minutes. Auto logout: Here is for you to set auto logout interval once login user remains inactive for a specified time. Value ranges from 0 to 60 minutes. Navigation bar: Check the box here, system displays the navigation bar on the interface. 263 IPC Time Sync: You can input an interval here to synchronize the NVR time and IPC time. Startup wizard: Once you check the box here, system will go to the startup wizard directly when the system restarts the next time. Otherwise, it will go to the login interface. Mouse sensitivity: You can set double click speed via dragging the slide bard. You can Click Default button to restore default setup. Enable IVS: Check the box to enable IVS function, system can display IVS rule on the preview interface. Figure 4-160 4.16.2 Data and Time From Main menu->Setting->System->General, you can go to the general interface. See Figure 4-161. System time: Here is for you to set system time Date format: There are three types: YYYYY-MM-DD: MM-DD-YYYYY or DD-MM-YYYY. Date separator: There are three denotations to separate date: dot, beeline and solidus. DST: Here you can set DST time and date by week or by date. Please enable DST function and then select setup mode. Please input start time and end time and click Save button. Time format: There are two types: 24-hour mode or 12-hour mode. NTP: It is to set NTP server, port and interval. Note:
Since system time is very important, do not modify time casually unless there is a must!
Before your time modification, please stop record operation first!
After completing all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. 264 Figure 4-161 4.16.3 Holiday Please refer to chapter 4.10.6 for detailed information. 4.17 Device Maintenance and Manager 4.17.1 System Info 4.17.1.1 Version From main menu->Info->System->version, you can go to version interface. Here is for you to view some version information. See Figure 4-162. Please note the following figure for reference only. Channel Alarm in Alarm out System version Build Date Web Serial number 265 4.17.1.2 BPS Here is for you to view current video bit rate (kb/s) and resolution. See Figure 4-163. Figure 4-162 Figure 4-163 4.17.1.3 Online User Here is for you manage online users connected to your NVR. See Figure 4-164. 266 You can click button to disconnect or block one user if you have proper system right. System detects there is any newly added or deleted user in each five seconds and refresh the list automatically. 4.17.1.4 Remote Device Information Figure 4-164 From main menu->info-Event, here you can view the channel status of the remote device, connection log and etc. See Figure 4-165. 267 Figure 4-165 4.17.1.5 Remote 4.17.1.5.1 Device Status Here you can view the IPC status of the corresponding channel such as motion detect, video loss, tampering, alarm and etc. See Figure 4-166. IPC status:
: Front-end does not support.
: Front-end supports.
: There is alarm event from current front-end. Connection status:
: Connection succeeded.
: Connection failed. Refresh: Click it to get latest front-end channel status. 268 4.17.1.5.2 Firmware Figure 4-166 It is to view channel, IP address, manufacturer, type, system version, SN, video input, audio input, external alarm and etc. See Figure 4-167. Figure 4-167 269 4.17.2 Log From Main menu->Info->Log, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-168. Start time/end time: Pleased select start time and end time, then click search button. You can view the log files in a list. System max displays 100 logs in one page. It can max save 1024 log files. Please use page up/down button on the interface or the front panel to view more. Tips Double click a log item to view its detailed information. See Figure 4-169. Click PgUp/PgDn to view more logs. Figure 4-168 Figure 4-169 270 4.17.3 Voice Note This function is for some series product only. The audio function is to manage audio files and set schedule play function. It is to realize audio broadcast activation function. 4.17.3.1.1 File Manage Here you can add audio file, listen to the audio file, or rename/delete audio file. Here you can also set audio volume. See Figure 4-170. Figure 4-170 Click Add button, you can add audio file and import the audio file via the USB device. The audio file format shall be MP3 or PCM. See Figure 4-171. Important The audio file shall be saved on the USB device. You need to connect the USB device all the time;
otherwise, the audio link function may fail. So, if you want to use the audio trigger function, please make sure the audio file is on the UBS device and the USB device has connected to the NVR before the NVR boots up. You need to make sure the USB device connection is always there if you want to manage and use the audio file function. 271 Figure 4-171 4.17.3.1.2 Schedule It is to set schedule broadcast function. You can play the different audio files in the specified periods. See Figure 4-172. Figure 4-172 4.17.4 Account Here is for you to implement account management. See Figure 4-173. Here you can:
Add new user 272 Modify user Add group Modify group Modify password. For account management please note:
For the user account name and the user group, the string max length is 6-byte. The backspace in front of or at the back of the string is invalid. There can be backspace in the middle. The string includes the valid character, letter, number, underline, subtraction sign, and dot. The default user amount is 64 and the default group amount is 20. System account adopts two-level management: group and user. No limit to group or user amount. For group or user management, there are two levels: admin and user. The user name and group name can consist of eight bytes. One name can only be used once. There are three default users: admin/888888 and hidden user default. Hidden user default is for system interior use only and can not be deleted. When there is no login user, hidden user default automatically login. You can set some rights such as monitor for this user so that you can view some channel view without login. One user should belong to one group. User right can not exceed group right. About reusable function: this function allows multiple users use the same account to login. About user account and MAC. When you add a new user, you can input the MAC address of current user. Only the user of the same MAC address can access the device remotely.(MAC address is for the device of the same LAN.) If you leave MAC address item in blank when you add a new user, the user of any MAC address can access the device remotely. You can set or change MAC address when you add or modify a user. The MAC address function is also valid for PSS login. Please note current function does not support IPV6. After all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. Figure 4-173 273 4.17.4.1.1 Add User Click modify user button in Figure 4-173 , the interface is shown as in Figure 4-174. Please input the user name, password, select the group it belongs to from the dropdown list. Then you can check the corresponding rights for current user. For convenient user management, usually we recommend the general user right is lower than the admin account. Username: admin. Password: admin. (administrator, local and network) Username: 888888. Password: 888888. (administrator, local only) Username: default. Password: default (hidden user). Hidden user default is for system interior use only and can not be deleted. When there is no login user, hidden user default automatically login. You can set some rights such as monitor for this user so that you can view some channels without login. Figure 4-174 When you create a new user, you can input the corresponding MAC address of current user. If you leave this item in blank, any MAC address user can share this user account to login. Please note system needs to check the validity of MAC. Only the 12-digit 0-f format address can pass the validity verification. System only saves small character even you input capitalized one. You can see the corresponding prompt if there is any illegal input. Click the Set button after the period, you can set valid period to use current account. See Figure 4-175. 274 Click Set button, you can set six periods in one day. See Figure 4-176. Check the box after the period, you can enable current setup. Figure 4-175 Figure 4-176 275 4.17.4.1.2 Modify user Click
, you can go to the following interface to change user information. See Figure 4-177. For admin, 888888, and default (hidden user), you can not change period setup. Figure 4-177 4.17.4.1.3 Change Password In Figure 4-177, check the Modify password box, you can change password. Please input old password, and then input new password twice to confirm. The password can contain 32-byte and the space at the begin or at the end of the password are null. It can contain in the middle of the password. For the user of account right, it can change the password of other users. 4.17.4.1.4 Add/Modify Group In Figure 4-173, click Group button, you can see the following interface. See Figure 4-178. 276 Figure 4-178 Click add group button in Figure 4-178 , the interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-179. Here you can input group name and then input some memo information if necessary. There are total 98 rights such as control panel, shut down, real-time monitor, playback, record, record file backup, PTZ, user account, system information view, alarm input/output setup, system setup, log view, clear log, upgrade system, control device and etc. Figure 4-179 277 4.17.4.1.5 Security Question The security question is shown as below. See Figure 4-180. Here you can change security questions. Figure 4-180 4.17.5 Update 4.17.5.1 Local Update From Mani menu->Setting->Info->Update, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 4-181. a) Insert USB device that contain the upgrade file. b) Click Start button and then select the .bin file. c) You can see the corresponding dialogue box after the update process is complete. 278 Figure 4-181 4.17.5.2 Uboot When device is booting up, it can auto detect the USB device and the update file on it. It can auto update once there is proper upgrade file. Important USB device root directory shall have u-boot.bin.img and update.img files. USB device shall be FAT32 mode. For 4X series product, it only updates update.img. The update.img shall be renamed as recovery.img and is saved on the root directory. USB device shall be on the USB 2.0 port, otherwise device can not detect or update. 4.17.6 Default You can restore factory default setup to fix some problems when the device is running slowly. Configuration error occurred. From Main menu->Setting->System->Default, you can go to the default interface. See Figure 4-182. Click default icon, system pops up a dialogue box. You can highlight to restore factory default setup. All Camera Network Event Storage System 279 Please highlight icon to select the corresponding function. After all the setups please click OK button, system goes back to the previous menu. Warning!
After you use default function, some your customized setup may lose forever! Please think twice before you begin the operation!
Figure 4-182 4.17.7 RS232 From Main menu->Setting->System->RS232, RS232 interface is shown as below. There are five items. See Figure 4-183. Function: There are various devices for you to select. Console is for you to use the COM or mini -end software to upgrade or debug the program. The control keyboard is for you to control the device via the special keyboard. Transparent COM (adapter) is to connect to the PC to transfer data directly. Protocol COM is for card overlay function. Network keyboard is for you to use the special keyboard to control the device. PTZ matrix is to connect to the peripheral matrix control. Baud rate: You can select proper baud rate. Data bit: You can select proper data bit. The value ranges from 5 to 8. Stop bit: There are three values: 1/1.5/2. Parity: there are five choices: none/odd/even/space mark. System default setup is:
Function: Console Baud rate:115200 Data bit:8 Stop bit:1 280 Parity: None After completing all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. Figure 4-183 4.17.8 Auto Maintain Here you can set auto-reboot time and auto-delete old files setup. You can set to delete the files for the specified days. See Figure 4-184. You can select proper setup from dropdown list. After all the setups please click save button, system goes back to the previous menu. Figure 4-184 281 4.17.9 Logout /Shutdown/Restart From Mani menu->Operation->Shutdown, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 4-185. Shutdown: System shuts down and turns off power. Logout: Log out menu. You need to input password when you login the next time. Restart: reboot device. If you shut down the device, there is a process bar for your reference, system waits for 3 seconds and then shut down (You can not cancel). Please note, sometimes you need to input the proper password to shut down the device. Figure 4-185 282 5 Web Operation 5.1 General Introduction The device web provides channel monitor menu tree, search, alarm setup, system setup, PTZ control and monitor window and etc. Important The following operation is based on 32-channel series device. 5.1.1 Preparation Before log in, please make sure:
Network connection is right NVR and PC network setup is right. Please refer to network setup(main menu->setting->network) Use order ping ***.***.***.***(* NVR IP address) to check connection is OK or not. Usually the return TTL value should be less than 255. Open the IE and then input NVR IP address. System can automatically download latest web control and the new version can overwrite the previous one. About PoE address setup, operation and allocation. 1) Insert PoE After you insert PoE, device may try to set a corresponding IP address of the Switch network adapter. First, system tries to set via arp ping. It then uses DHCP if it finds the DHCP is enabled. After successfully set IP address, system may use Switch to send out broadcast, system considers the connection is OK when there is any response. Now system is trying to login the newly found IPC. Now please check the interface, you can see the corresponding digital channel is active now. You can see a small PoE icon at the top left corner. You can see the PoE channel, PoE port information and etc from the connection list of the registration interface (Chapter 5.8.1.1). For the IP search list, you need to click the IP search to display or refresh. 2) Remove PoE After you removed PoE, you can see the corresponding digital channel becomes idle (disable). On the registration interface, it is removed from the connected list. For the IP search list, you need to click the IP search to refresh. 3) After you insert PoE, system follows the principles listed below to map channel. a) If it is your first time to insert PoE, system can map it to the first idle channel. After map, the channel can memorize the MAC address of the IPC. It is a <Channel>---<IPC mac> map. If current channel does not connect to other device, system can memorize current MAC address, otherwise it can refresh to the newly added device and memorize the <PoE port>---<Channel>. b) If it is your second time to insert the PoE, system can check the saved MAC address according to <Channel>---<IPC mac> map to make sure current IPC has connected or not. If system finds the previous information and the channel is idle, system can map it to the previously used channel. Otherwise system goes to the next step. 283 c) Thirdly, according to the <PoE port>---<Channel> map, system can know the previous mapping channel of current PoE port. System can select current channel if it is free. Otherwise, it goes to the next step:
d) Fourthly, system goes to find the first idle channel it can get. Generally speaking, once you insert PoE, system follow the steps listed above to find the channel available. 4) When you insert PoE, all channels are in use now. System can pop up a dialogue box for you to select a channel to overwrite. The title of the pop-up interface is the name of the current operation PoE port. In this interface, All PoE channel become grey and can not select. 5.1.2 Log in Open the IE and then input the NVR IP address in the address column. For example, if your NVR IP address is 192.168.1.108, then please input http:// 192.168.1.108 in IE address column. See Figure 5-1. Input IP address here. Figure 5-1 System pops up warning information to ask you whether install Web plug-in or not. Please click yes button. If you cant download the ActiveX file, please modify your settings as follows. See Figure 5-2. 284 Figure 5-2 After installation, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-3. Figure 5-3 Please input your user name and password. Default factory name is admin and password is admin. Note: For security reasons, please modify your password after you first login. 5.2 LAN Mode For the LAN mode, after you logged in, you can see the main window. See Figure 5-9. This main window can be divided into the following sections. 285 Section 1: there are six function buttons: Livechapter 0, setup (chapter 5.8), info (Chapter 5.9), playback (chapter 5.10), alarm (chapter 5.11), and logout (chapter 5.12). Section 2: There are monitor channels successfully connected to the NVR. Please refer to Figure 5-4 for main stream and extra stream switch information. Section 3: Open all. Open all button is to enable/disable all-channel real-time monitor. Here you can select main stream/sub stream too. See Figure 5-5. Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Section 4: Start Talk button. You can click this button to enable audio talk. Click to select bidirectional talk mode. There are four options: DEFAULTG711aG711u and PCM. See Figure 5-6. After you enable the bidirectional talk, the Start talk button becomes End Talk button and it becomes yellow. Please note, if audio input port from the device to the client-end is using the first channel audio input port. During the bidirectional talk process, system will not encode the audio data from the 1-channel. Figure 5-6 Section 5: Instant record button. Click it, the button becomes yellow and system begins manual record. See Figure 5-7. Click it again, system restores previous record mode. Figure 5-7 Section 6: Local play button. 286 The Web can playback the saved (Extension name is dav) files in the PC-end. Click local play button, system pops up the following interface for you to select local play file. See Figure 5-8. Figure 5-8 Section 7Zero-channel encoding. Please refer to chapter 5.6 for detailed information. Section 8: PTZ operation panel. Please refer to chapter 5.4 for detailed information. Section 9: Image setup and alarm setup. Please refer to chapter 5.5 for detailed information. Section 10: From the left to the right ,you can see video quality/fluency/ full screen/1-window/4-window/6-window/8-window/9-window/13-window/16-window/20-window/25-win dow/36-window.. You can set video fluency and real-time feature priority. Figure 5-9 5.3 Real-time Monitor 287 In section 2, left click the channel name you want to view, you can see the corresponding video in current window. On the top left corner, you can view device IP(172.11.10.11), channel number(1), network monitor bit stream(2202Kbps) and stream type(M=main stream, S=sub stream). See Figure 5-10. 1 2 3 4 On the top right corner, there are six unction buttons. See Figure 5-11. Figure 5-10 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 5-11 1: Digital zoom: Click this button and then left drag the mouse in the zone to zoom in. right click mouse system restores original status. 2: Local record. When you click local record button, the system begins recording and this button becomes highlighted. You can go to system folder RecordDownload to view the recorded file. 3: Snapshot picture. You can snapshot important video. All images are memorized in system client folder PictureDownload (default). 4: Audio :Turn on or off audio.(It has no relationship with system audio setup ) 5: Close video. 5.4 PTZ Before PTZ operation, please make sure you have properly set PTZ protocol. (Please refer to chapter 5.8.5.10). There are eight direction keys. In the middle of the eight direction keys, there is a 3D intelligent positioning key. Click 3D intelligent positioning key, system goes back to the single screen mode. Drag the mouse in the screen to adjust section size. It can realize PTZ automatically. Please refer to the following sheet for PTZ setup information. Parameter Function Scan Select Scan from the dropdown list. Click Set button, you can set scan left and right limit. Use direction buttons to move the camera to you desired location and then click left limit button. Then move the camera again and then click right limit button to set a right limit. 288 Parameter Function Preset Select Preset from the dropdown list. Turn the camera to the corresponding position and Input the preset value. Click Add button to add a preset. Tour Select Tour from the dropdown list. Input preset value in the column. Click Add preset button, you have added one preset in the tour. Repeat the above procedures you can add more presets in one tour. Or you can click delete preset button to remove one preset from the tour. Pattern Select Pattern from the dropdown list. You can input pattern value and then click Start button to begin PTZ movement such as zoom, focus, iris, direction and etc. Then you can click Add button to set one pattern. Aux Please input the corresponding aux value here. You can select one option and then click AUX on or AUX off button. You can turn on or turn off the light/wiper. Light and wiper 3D Intelligent Positioning Key You can click this icon to display or hide the PTZ control platform. Figure 5-12 289 5.5 Image/Alarm-out Select one monitor channel video and then click Image button in section 9, the interface is shown as Figure 5-13. 5.5.1 Here you can adjust its brightness, contrast, hue and saturation. (Current channel border becomes Image green). Or you can click Reset button to restore system default setup. Figure 5-13 5.5.2 Alarm output Here you can enable or disable the alarm signal of the corresponding port. See Figure 5-14. Figure 5-14 5.6 Zero-channel Encode Select a window and then click zero-channel encode button, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-15. 290 Figure 5-15 5.7 WAN Login In WAN mode, after you logged in, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-16. Figure 5-16 Please refer to the following contents for LAN and WAN login difference. 1) In the WAN mode, system opens the main stream of the first channel to monitor by default. The open/close button on the left pane is null. 2) You can select different channels and different monitor modes at the bottom of the interface. See 291 Figure 5-17. Figure 5-17 Important The window display mode and the channel number are by default. For example, for the 16-channel, the max window split mode is 16. 3) Multiple-channel monitor, system adopts extra stream to monitor by default. Double click one channel, system switches to single channel and system uses main stream to monitor. You can view there are two icons at the left top corner of the channel number for you reference. M stands for main stream. S stands for sub stream (extra stream). 4) If you login via the WAN mode, system does not support alarm activation to open the video function in the Alarm setup interface. Important For multiple-channel monitor mode, system adopts extra stream to monitor by default. You can not modify manually. All channels are trying to synchronize. Please note the synchronization effect still depends on your network environments. For bandwidth consideration, system can not support monitor and playback at the same time. System auto closes monitor or playback interface when you are searching setup in the configuration interface. It is to enhance search speed. 5.8 Setup 5.8.1 Camera 5.8.1.1 Registration From Main menu->Setting->Camera->Registration, you can see the following interface. See Figure 5-18. 292 Figure 5-18 Figure 5-19 Please refer to the following sheet for parameter information. Parameter Function Device search Add Modify Click Device search button, you can view the searched device information on the list. It includes device IP address, port, device name, manufacturer and type. Select a device in the list and then click Add button, system can connect the device automatically and add it to the Added device list. Or you can double click one item in the list to add a device. Click or any device in the Added device list, you can change the corresponding channel setup. 293 Parameter Function Delete Type Click
, you can delete the remote connection of the corresponding channel. There are two connection types. You can use the network to connect to the camera or use the WIFI. The means current network camera connection mode is general; the means current network camera mode is hotspot. Delete Select a device in the Added device list and then click Delete button, system can disconnect the device and remove it from the Added device list. Manual Add Click it, the interface is shown as in Figure 5-19. Here you can add network camera manually. You can select a channel from the dropdown list (Here only shows disconnection channel.) Note:
System supports manufactures such as Panasonic, Sony, Dynacolor, Samsung, AXIS, Arecont, Dahua and Onvif standard protocol. If you do not input IP address here. System uses default IP 192.168.0.0 and system does not connect to this IP. Can not add two devices at the same time. Click OK button here, system only connect to the corresponding device of current channel. 5.8.1.2 Image Note Slight difference may be found since the connected network camera may not be same model. Here you can view device property information. The setups become valid immediately after you set. See Figure 5-20. 294 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-20 Channel Please select a channel from the dropdown list. Period Hue It divides one day (24 hours) to two periods. You can set different hue, brightness, and contrast for different periods. It is to adjust monitor video brightness and darkness level. The default value is 50. The bigger the value is, the large the contrast between the bright and dark section is and vice versa. Brightness It is to adjust monitor window brightness. The default value is 50. The larger the number is , the bright the video is. When you input the value here, the bright section and the dark section of the video will be adjusted accordingly. You can use this function when the whole video is too dark or too bright. Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too high. The value ranges from 0 to 100.The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. Contrast It is to adjust monitor window contrast. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number is, the higher the contrast is. You can use this function when the whole video bright is OK but the contrast is not proper. Please note the video may become hazy if the value is too low. If this value is too high, the dark section may lack brightness while the bright section may over exposure .The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. Saturation It is to adjust monitor window saturation. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The larger the number is, the strong the color is. This value has no effect on the general brightness of the whole video. The video color may become too strong if the value is too high. For the grey part of the video, the distortion may occur if the white balance is not accurate. Please note the video may not be 295 Gain attractive if the value is too low. The recommended value ranges from 40 to 60. The gain adjust is to set the gain value. The smaller the value is, the low the noise is. But the brightness is also too low in the dark environments. It can enhance the video brightness if the value is high. But the video noise may become too clear. White level It is to enhance video effect. Color mode It includes several modes such as standard, color. You can select corresponding color mode here, you can see hue, brightness, and contrast and etc will adjust accordingly. Auto Iris It is to enable/disable auto iris function. Flip It is to switch video up and bottom limit. This function is disabled by default. Mirror It is to switch video left and right limit. This function is disabled by default. BLC Mode BLC WDR The device auto exposures according to the environments situation so that the darkest area of the video is cleared For the WDR scene, this function can lower the high bright section and enhance the brightness of the low bright section. So that you can view these two sections clearly at the same time. The value ranges from 1 to 100. When you switch the camera from no-WDR mode to the WDR mode, system may lose several seconds record video. HLC After you enabled HLC function, the device can lower the brightness of the brightest section according to the HLC control level. It can reduce the area of the halo and lower the brightness of the whole video. Off It is to disable the BLC function. Please note this function is disabled by default. Profile It is to set the white balance mode. It has effect on the general hue of the video. This function is on by default. You can select the different scene mode such as auto, sunny, cloudy, home, office, night, disable and etc to adjust the video to the best quality. Auto: The auto white balance is on. System can auto compensate the color temperature to make sure the vide color is proper. Sunny: The threshold of the white balance is in the sunny mode. Night: The threshold of the white balance is in the night mode. Customized: You can set the gain of the red/blue channel. The value reneges from 0 to 100. Day/Night It is to set device color and the B/W mode switch. The default setup is auto. Color: Device outputs the color video. Auto: Device auto select to output the color or the B/W 296 video according to the device feature (The general bright of the video or there is IR light or not.) B/W: The device outputs the black and white video. Sensor: It is to set when there is peripheral connected IR light. 5.8.1.3 Encode 5.8.1.3.1 Encode The encode interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-21. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-21 Channel Please select a channel from the dropdown list. Video enable Check the box here to enable extra stream video. This item is enabled by default. Code stream type It includes main stream, motion stream and alarm stream. You can select different encode frame rates form different recorded events. System supports active control frame function (ACF). It allows you to record in different frame rates. For example, you can use high frame rate to record important events, record scheduled event in lower frame rate and it allows you to set different frame rates for motion detection record and alarm record. Compression The main bit stream supports H.264. The extra stream supports H.264, MJPG. Resolution The resolution here refers to the capability of the network camera. 297 Frame Rate PAL125f/sNTSC130f/s. Bit Rate Main stream: You can set bit rate here to change video quality. The large the bit rate is, the better the quality is. Please refer to recommend bit rate for the detailed information. Extra stream: In CBR, the bit rate here is the max value. In dynamic video, system needs to low frame rate or video quality to guarantee the value. The value is null in VBR mode. Reference bit rate Recommended bit rate value according to the resolution and frame rate you have set. I Frame Here you can set the P frame amount between two I frames. The value ranges from 1 to 150. Default value is 50. Recommended value is frame rate *2. Enable audio Check the box to enable audio function. Watermark enable The audio of the main stream is enabled by default. When this function is enabled, the record file has audio/video composite stream. For the sub stream, please check the video first and then enable audio. This function allows you to verify the video is tampered or not. Here you can select watermark bit stream, watermark mode and watermark character. Default character is DigitalCCTV. The max length is 85-digit. The character can only include number, character and underline. 5.8.1.3.2 Snapshot The snapshot interface is shown as in Figure 5-22. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-22 Snapshot type There are two modes: Regular (schedule) and Trigger. Regular snapshot is valid during the specified period you set. Trigger snapshot only is valid when motion detect alarm, tampering alarm or local activation alarm occurs. 298 Image size It is the same with the resolution of the main stream. Quality Interval Copy It is to set the image quality. There are six levels. It is to set snapshot frequency. The value ranges from 1s to 7s. Or you can set customized value. The max setup is 3600s/picture. Click it; you can copy current channel setup to other channel(s). 5.8.1.3.3 Video Overlay The video overlay interface is shown as in Figure 5-23. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-23 Cover-area Time Title Channel Title Check Preview or Monitor first. Click Set button, you can privacy mask the specified video in the preview or monitor video. System max supports 4 privacy mask zones. You can enable this function so that system overlays time information in video window. You can use the mouse to drag the time title position. You can view time title on the live video of the WEB or the playback video. You can enable this function so that system overlays channel information in video window. You can use the mouse to drag the channel title position. You can view channel title on the live video of the WEB or the playback video. 5.8.1.3.4 Path 299 The storage path interface is shown as in Figure 5-24. Here you can set snap image saved path (
in the preview interface) and the record storage path
(
in the preview interface).The default setup is C:\PictureDownload and C:\RecordDownload. Please click the Save button to save current setup. 5.8.1.4 Channel Name Here you can set channel name. See Figure 5-25. Figure 5-24 5.8.1.5 IPC Upgrade This interface is to upgrade network camera. See Figure 5-26. Figure 5-25 Click Browse button to select upgrade file. Or you can use filter to select several network cameras at the same time. 300 Figure 5-26 5.8.2 Network 5.8.2.1 TCP/IP The TCP/IP interface is shown as in Figure 5-27. Figure 5-27 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Mode There are two modes: static mode and the DHCP mode. The IP/submask/gateway are null when you select the DHCP mode to auto search the IP. If you select the static mode, you need to set the 301 IP/submask/gateway manually. If you select the DHCP mode, you can view the IP/submask/gateway from the DHCP. If you switch from the DHCP mode to the static mode, you need to reset the IP parameters. Besides, IP/submask/gateway and DHCP are read-only when the PPPoE dial is OK. Mac Address It is to display host Mac address. IP Version It is to select IP version. IPV4 or IPV6. You can access the IP address of these two versions. IP Address Please use the keyboard to input the corresponding number to modify the IP address and then set the corresponding subnet mask and the default gateway. Preferred DNS DNS IP address. Alternate DNS Alternate DNS IP address. For the IP address of IPv6 version, default gateway, preferred DNS and alternate DNS, the input value shall be 128-digit. It shall not be left in blank. LAN load System can process the downloaded data first if you enable this function. The download speed is 1.5X or 2.0X of the normal speed. 5.8.2.2 Connection The connection interface is shown as in Figure 5-28. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-28 Max connection It is the max Web connection for the same device. The value ranges from 1 to 120. The default setup is 120. TCP port The default value is 37777. You can input the actual port 302 number if necessary. UDP port HTTP port HTTPS The default value is 37778. You can input the actual port number if necessary. The default value is 80. You can input the actual port number if necessary. The default value is 443. You can input the actual port number if necessary. RTSP port The default value is 554. 5.8.2.3 WIFI AP Please note this function is for some series only. 5.8.2.3.1 General Setup The WIFI AP interface is shown as in Figure 5-29. Here you can set WIFI hotspot, so that the network camera can use the hotspot to connect to the network. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-29 SSID It is to set SSID name. You can use this name to search the device. Password It is to set SSID password. You can use this password to Seucurity Start IP/End IP WPS Remote device connect to the network. Select authentication from the dropdown list. Input start IP and end IP. The NVR can allocate the IP address in the range you specified here. Click WPS button to enable WPS function. After the network camera enabled this function, it can automatically connect to the network. In the list, you can view the network camera(s) that connected to the NVR. It includes signal intensity, IP, MAC address, bit rate, channel number, type, status and etc. 5.8.2.3.2 Advanced 303 Click Advanced butto, the interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-30. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 5-30 Parameter Function IPv4 address Input WIFI AP IP address. IPv4 netmask Input WIFI AP network mask. IPv4 gateway Input WIFI AP gateway. Start IP/End IP Input start IP and end IP. The NVR can allocate the IP address in the range you specified here. Upgrade Click it to upgrade WIFI AP module. 5.8.2.4 WIFI Please note this function is for the device of WIFI module. The WIFI interface is shown as in Figure 5-31. 304 Figure 5-31 Please check the box to enable WIFI function and then click the Search SSID button. Now you can view all the wireless network information in the following list. Double click a name to connect to it. Click Refresh button, you can view latest connection status. 5.8.2.5 3G 5.8.2.5.1 CDMA/GPRS The CDMA/GPRS interface is shown as in Figure 5-32. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 5-32 305 Parameter Function WLAN type Here you can select 3G network type to distinguish the 3G module from different ISP. The types include WCDMA CDMA1x and etc. APN/Dial No. Here is the important parameter of PPP. Authorization It includes PAP,CHAP,NO_AUTH. Pulse interval It is to set time to end 3G connection after you close extra stream monitor. For example, if you input 60 here, system ends 3G connection after you close extra stream monitor 60 seconds. Important If the pulse interval is 0, then system does not end 3G connection after you close the extra stream monitor. Pulse interval here is for extra stream only. This item is null if you are using main stream to monitor. 5.8.2.5.2 Mobile The mobile setup interface is shown as in Figure 5-33. Here you can activate (send out on) or turn off (Send out off) the 3G connected phone or mobile phone, or the phone you set to get alarm message. Check send SMS box and then input the phone number in the receiver column. Click to add one receiver. Repeat the above steps you can add more phones. Select a phone number and then click
, you can delete it. Click OK button to complete the setup. Figure 5-33 306 5.8.2.6 PPPoE The PPPoE interface is shown as in Figure 5-34. Input the PPPoE user name and password you get from the IPS (internet service provider) and enable PPPoE function. Please save current setup and then reboot the device to get the setup activated. Device connects to the internet via PPPoE after reboot. You can get the IP address in the WAN from the IP address column. Please note, you need to use previous IP address in the LAN to login the device. Please go to the IP address item to via the device current device information. You can access the client-end via this new address. Figure 5-34 5.8.2.7 DDNS The DDNS interface is shown as in Figure 5-35. The DDNS is to set to connect the various servers so that you can access the system via the server. Please go to the corresponding service website to apply a domain name and then access the system via the domain. It works even your IP address has changed. Please select DDNS from the dropdown list (Multiple choices). Before you use this function, please make sure your purchased device support current function. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-35 Server Type You can select DDNS protocol from the dropdown list and then enable DDNS function. 307 Parameter Function Server IP DDNS server IP address Server Port DDNS server port. Domain Name Your self-defined domain name. User The user name you input to log in the server. Password The password you input to log in the server. Update period Device sends out alive signal to the server regularly. You can set interval value between the device and DDNS server here. Dahua DDNS and Client-end Introduction 1) Background Introduction Device IP is not fixed if you use ADSL to login the network. The DDNS function allows you to access the NVR via the registered domain name. Besides the general DDNS, the Dahua DDNS works with the device from the manufacturer so that it can add the extension function. 2) Function Introduction The Dahua DDNS client has the same function as other DDNS client end. It realizes the bonding of the domain name and the IP address. Right now, current DDNS server is for our own devices only. You need to refresh the bonding relationship of the domain and the IP regularly. There is no user name, password or the ID registration on the server. At the same time, each device has a default domain name (Generated by MAC address) for your option. You can also use customized valid domain name (has not registered.). 3) Operation Before you use Dahua DDNS, you need to enable this service and set proper server address, port value and domain name. Server addresswww.dahuaddns.com Port number80 Domain nameThere are two modes: Default domain name and customized domain name. Except default domain name registration, you can also use customized domain name (You can input your self-defined domain name.) After successful registration, you can use domain name to login installed of the device IP. User name: It is optional. You can input your commonly used email address. Important Do not register frequently. The interval between two registrations shall be more than 60 seconds. Too many registration requests may result in server attack. System may take back the domain name that is idle for one year. You can get a notification email before the cancel operation if your email address setup is OK. 5.8.2.8 IP filter The IP filter interface is shown as in Figure 5-36. After you enabled trusted sites function, only the IP listed below can access current NVR. If you enable blocked sites function, the following listed IP addresses can not access current NVR. 308 Figure 5-36 5.8.2.9 Email The email interface is shown as in Figure 5-37. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-37 Enable SMTP Server Please check the box here to enable email function. Input server address and then enable this function. Port Default value is 25. You can modify it if necessary. 309 Parameter Function Anonymity User Name Password Sender Authentication
(Encryption mode) Subject Attachment Receiver Interval Health mail enable Update period
(interval) Email test For the server supports the anonymity function. You can auto login anonymously. You do not need to input the user name. password and the sender information. The user name of the sender email account. The password of sender email account. Sender email address. You can select SSL or none. Input email subject here. System can send out the email of the snapshot picture once you check the box here. Input receiver email address here. Max three addresses. It supports SSL, TLS email box. The send interval ranges from 0 to 3600 seconds. 0 means there is no interval. Please note system will not send out the email immediately when the alarm occurs. When the alarm, motion detection or the abnormity event activates the email, system sends out the email according to the interval you specified here. This function is very useful when there are too many emails activated by the abnormity events, which may result in heavy load for the email server. Please check the box here to enable this function. This function allows the system to send out the test email to check the connection is OK or not. Please check the box to enable this function and then set the corresponding interval. The value ranges from 30 minutes to 1440 minutes. System can send out the email regularly as you set here. The system will automatically sent out a email once to test the connection is OK or not .Before the email test, please save the email setup information. 5.8.2.10 UPnP It allows you to establish the mapping relationship between the LAN and the public network. Here you can also add, modify or remove UPnP item. See Figure 5-38. In the Windows OS, From Start->Control Panel->Add or remove programs. Click the Add/Remove Windows Components and then select the Network Services from the Windows Components Wizard. Click the Details button and then check the Internet Gateway Device Discovery and Control client and UPnP User Interface. Please click OK to begin installation. Enable UPnP from the Web. If your UPnP is enabled in the Windows OS, the NVR can auto detect it via the My Network Places 310 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-38 PAT Status Check the corresponding box to enable PAT function. Display UPnP function status. It is corresponding to the UPnP mapping information on the router. Check the box before the service name to enable current PAT service. Otherwise, the service is null. Service nameCustomized name. ProtocolProtocol type. Port mapping list Internal portThe port mapped to the port. External portThe port current device needs to map. Device has three mapping items: HTTP/TCP/UDP. Note When you set the external port (outport) of the router, the value ranges from 1024 to 5000. Do not use port 1255 or system port 2561023, in case there is conflict. Click Add button to add map relationship. Note For the data transmission protocol TCP/UDP, the external port and the internal port shall be the same to guarantee proper data transmission. Select one service and then click to delete map relationship. Add Delete 5.8.2.11 SNMP The SNMP interface is shown as in Figure 5-39. The SNMP allows the communication between the network management work station software and the proxy of the managed device. It is reserved for the 3rd party to develop. 311 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-39 SNMP Port Read Community Write Community Trap address Trap port SNMP version 5.8.2.12 Multicast The listening port of the proxy program of the device. It is a UDP port not a TCP port. The value ranges from 1 to 65535. The default value is 161 It is a string. It is a command between the manage process and the proxy process. It defined the authentication, access control and the management relationship between one proxy and one group of the managers. Please make sure the device and the proxy are the same. The read community will read all the objects the SNMP supported in the specified name. The default setup is public. It is a string. It is a command between the manage process and the proxy process. It defined the authentication, access control and the management relationship between one proxy and one group of the managers. Please make sure the device and the proxy are the same. The read community will read/write/access all the objects the SNMP supported in the specified name. The default setup is write. The destination address of the Trap information from the proxy program of the device. The destination port of the Trap information from the proxy program of the device. It is for the gateway device and the client-end PC in the LAN to exchange the information. It is a non-protocol connection port. It has no effect on the network applications. It is a UDP port not TCP port. The value ranges from 1 to 165535. The default value is 162. Check V1, system only processes the information of V1. Check V2, system only processes the information of V2. The multicast interface is shown as in Figure 5-40. Multicast is a transmission mode of data packet. When there is multiple-host to receive the same data 312 packet, multiple-cast is the best option to reduce the broad width and the CPU load. The source host can just send out one data to transit. This function also depends on the relationship of the group member and group of the outer. 5.8.2.13 Auto Register The auto register interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-41. Figure 5-40 This function allows the device to auto register to the proxy you specified. In this way, you can use the client-end to access the NVR and etc via the proxy. Here the proxy has a switch function. In the network service, device supports the server address of IPv4 or domain. Please follow the steps listed below to use this function. Please set proxy server address, port, and sub-device name at the device-end. Please enable the auto register function, the device can auto register to the proxy server. Figure 5-41 5.8.2.14 Alarm Centre The alarm center interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-42. This interface is reserved for you to develop. System can upload alarm signal to the alarm center when local alarm occurs. Before you use alarm center, please set server IP, port and etc. When an alarm occurs, system can send out data as the protocol defined, so the client-end can get the data. 313 Figure 5-42 5.8.2.15 HTTPS In this interface, you can set to make sure the PC can successfully login via the HTTPS. It is to guarantee communication data security. The reliable and stable technology can secure the user information security and device safety. See Figure 5-43. Note You need to implement server certificate again if you have changed device IP. You need to download root certificate if it is your first time to use HTTPS on current PC. Figure 5-43 5.8.2.15.1 Create Server Certificate If it is your first time to use this function, please follow the steps listed below. In Figure 5-43, click button, input country name, state name and etc. Click Create button. See Figure 5-44. Note Please make sure the IP or domain information is the same as your device IP or domain name. 314 Figure 5-44 You can see the corresponding prompt. See Figure 5-45. Now the server certificate is successfully created. 5.8.2.15.2 Download root certificate Figure 5-45 In Figure 5-43, click button, system pops up a dialogue box. See Figure 5-46. Click Open button, you can go to the following interface. See Figure 5-47. Figure 5-46 315 Click Install certificate button, you can go to certificate wizard. See Figure 5-48. Figure 5-47 Click Next button to continue. Now you can select a location for the certificate. See Figure 5-49. Figure 5-48 316 Click Next button, you can see the certificate import process is complete. See Figure 5-50. Figure 5-49 Figure 5-50 Click Finish button, you can see system pops up a security warning dialogue box. See Figure 5-51. Figure 5-51 317 Click Yes button, system pops up the following dialogue box, you can see the certificate download is complete. See Figure 5-52. Figure 5-52 5.8.2.15.3 View and set HTTPS port From Setup->Network->Connection, you can see the following interface. See Figure 5-53. You can see HTTPS default value is 443. Figure 5-53 5.8.2.15.4 Login Open the browser and then input https://xx.xx.xx.xx:port. xx.xx.xx.xx: is your device IP or domain mane. Port is your HTTPS port. If you are using default HTTPS value 443, you do not need to add port information here. You can input https://xx.xx.xx.xx to access. Now you can see the login interface if your setup is right. 5.8.2.16 P2P You can use your cell phone to scan the QR code and add it to the cell phone client. Via the SN from scanning the QR code, you can access the device in the WAN. Please refer to the P2P operation manual included in the resources CD. The P2P interface is shown as in Figure 5-54. Check the Enable box to enable P2P function and then click the Save button. Now you can view the device status and SN. 318 Figure 5-54 5.8.3 5.8.3.1 Video detect Event 5.8.3.1.1 Motion Detect After analysis video, system can generate a video loss alarm when the detected moving signal reached the sensitivity you set here. The motion detect interface is shown as in Figure 5-55. 319 Figure 5-55 Figure 5-56 320 Figure 5-57 Figure 5-58 Figure 5-59 321 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-60 Enable You need to check the box to enable motion detection function. Please select a channel from the dropdown list. Period Motion detection function becomes activated in the specified periods. See Figure 5-56. There are six periods in one day. Please draw a circle to enable corresponding period. Click OK button, system goes back to motion detection interface, please click save button to exit. Anti-dither System only memorizes one event during the anti-dither period. The value ranges from 5s to 600s. Sensitivity Region There are six levels. The sixth level has the highest sensitivity. If you select motion detection type, you can click this button to set motion detection zone. The interface is shown as in Figure 5-57. Here you can set motion detection zone. There are four zones for you to set. Please select a zone first and then left drag the mouse to select a zone. The corresponding color zone displays different detection zone. You can click Fn button to switch between the arm mode and disarm mode. In arm mode, you can click the direction buttons to move the green rectangle to set the motion detection zone. After you completed the setup, please click ENTER button to exit current setup. Do remember click save button to save current setup. If you click ESC button to exit the region setup interface system will not save your zone setup. Record channel System auto activates motion detection channel(s) to record once an alarm occurs. Please note you need to set motion detect record period and go to Storage-> Schedule to set current channel as schedule record. Record Delay System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended. The value ranges from 10s to 300s. Alarm out Enable alarm activation function. You need to select alarm output port so that system can activate corresponding alarm device when an alarm occurs. Latch System can delay the alarm output for specified time after an alarm ended. The value ranges from 1s to 300s. Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function. 322 Parameter Function Buzzer Check the box here to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs. Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the centre (Including alarm centre. Message When 3G network connection is OK, system can send out a message when motion detect occurs. Send Email If you enabled this function, System can send out an email to alert you when an alarm occurs. Tour You need to click setup button to select tour channel. System begins 1-wiindow or multiple-window tour display among the channel(s) you set to record when an alarm occurs. See Figure 5-59. PTZ Activation Here you can set PTZ movement when alarm occurs. Such as go to preset X. See Figure 5-58. Snapshot Click setup button to select snapshot channel. See Figure 5-60. Video Matrix This function is for motion detect only. Check the box here to enable video matrix function. Right now system supports one-channel tour function. System takes first come and first serve principle to deal with the activated tour. System will process the new tour when a new alarm occurs after previous alarm ended. Otherwise it restores the previous output status before the alarm activation. 5.8.3.1.2 Video Loss The video loss interface is shown as in Figure 5-61. Please note video loss does not support anti-dither, sensitivity, region setup. For rest setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. Figure 5-61 323 5.8.3.1.3 Tampering The tampering interface is shown as in Figure 5-62. After analysis video, system can generate a tampering alarm when the detected moving signal reached the sensitivity you set here. For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. 5.8.3.2 IVS (Optional) Figure 5-62 Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
From main menu->Setup->Event->IVS, you can go to the IVS interface. It includes four interfaces:
Tripwire/intrusion/object/scene. 5.8.3.2.1 Tripwire Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
From main menu->Setup->Event->IVS->Tripwire, you can see the following interface. See Figure 5-63. System generates an alarm once there is any object crossing the tripwire in the specified direction. 324 Figure 5-63 Check the Tripwire box to enable tripwire function. Select SN (Line1/2/3/4) and direction, and then input customized rule name. No. and Line1/2/3/4: System supports four tripwires. Each SN stands for one tripwire. Direction: There are three options: A->B, B->A, both. System can generate an alarm once there is any object crossing in the specified direction. Now you can draw a rule. Click Draw rule button and then left click mouse to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a direct line, curve or polygon. Right click mouse to complete. See Figure 5-64. Figure 5-64 325 Click to draw filter object. See Figure 5-65. Select the blue line and then use mouse to adjust zone size. Note Figure 5-65 Each rule can set two sizes (min size/max size). Once the object is smaller than the min size or larger than the max size, there is no alarm. Please make sure the max size is larger than the min size. Click Ok to complete the rule setup. For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. 5.8.3.2.2 Intrusion (Cross warning zone) Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
From main menu->Setup->Event->IVS->Intrusion, the intrusion interface is shown as below. See Figure 4-102. 326 Figure 5-66 Check the Intrusion box to enable intrusion function. Select SN (Area1/2/3/4) and direction, and then input customized rule name. No. and Area1/2/3/4: System supports four zones. Each SN stands for one zone. Direction: There are three options: A->B, B->A, both. System can generate an alarm once there is any object enter/exit (Or both) the zone. Now you can draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a line first and then right click mouse to draw another line until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse to exit. Click Ok to complete the rule setup. Click to draw the zone. See Figure 5-67. 327 Figure 5-67 For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. 5.8.3.2.3 Object Detect Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
For the same channel,the object detect and the intrusion can not be valid at the same time. From main menu->Setup->Event->IVS->Object, the object interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-68. Figure 5-68 328 Check the Object box to enable object detect function. Select SN (object1/2/3/4) and rule type, and then input customized rule name. No. and Object1/2/3/4: System supports four zones. Each SN stands for one zone. Rule type: Please select from the dropdown list. There are two types: Missing object detect/abandoned object detect. Period: It refers to the object in/out the zone time. Click to draw the rule. See Figure 5-69. Figure 5-69 Now you can draw a rule. Left click mouse to draw a line, until you draw a rectangle, you can right click mouse. Click Ok to complete the rule setup. For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. 5.8.3.2.4 Change Scene Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
When the detected scene changes ,the system can generate an alarm. From main menu->Setup->Event->IVS->Change scene, the interface is shown as in Figure 5-70. 329 Figure 5-70 For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. 5.8.3.3 Face Detect (Optional) Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
When camera detects human face, system can generate an alarm. From main menu->Setup->Event->Face detect, the interface is shown as in Figure 5-71. Enable face boost: Check the box here, system can enhance the human face display pane. Sensitivity: System supports 6 levels. The sixth level has the highest sensitivity. For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1. Figure 5-71 330 5.8.3.4 Audio Detect (Optional) Please make sure you are connecting to the smart network camera, otherwise you can not use IVS function!
System can generate an alarm once it detect the audio input is abnormal or audio volume changes. From main menu->Setup->Event->Audio detect, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 5-72. Input abnormal: Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio input is abnormal. Intensity change: Check the box here, system can generate an alarm once the audio volume becomes strong. Sensitivity: It refers to the audio recognition sensitivity. The higher the value is, the higher the sensitivity is. Threshold: It is to set intensity change threshold. The smaller the value is, the higher the sensitivity is. For detailed setups, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.1.1 motion detect for detailed information. 5.8.3.5 Alarm Figure 5-72 Before operation, please make sure you have properly connected alarm devices such as buzzer. The input mode includes local alarm and network alarm. 5.8.3.5.1 Local Alarm The local alarm interface is shown as in Figure 5-73. It refers to alarm from the local device. 331 Figure 5-73 Figure 5-74 332 Figure 5-75 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Enable You need to check the box to enable this function. Please select a channel from the dropdown list. Period This function becomes activated in the specified periods. There are six periods in one day. Please draw a circle to enable corresponding period. Select date. If you do not select, current setup applies to today only. You can select all week column to apply to the whole week. Click OK button, system goes back to local alarm interface, please click save button to exit. Anti-dither System only memorizes one event during the anti-dither period. The value ranges from 5s to 600s. Sensor type There are two options: NO/NC. Record channel Record Delay Alarm out System auto activates motion detection channel(s) to record once an alarm occurs. Please note you need to set alarm record period and go to Storage-> Schedule to set current channel as schedule record. System can delay the record for specified time after alarm ended. The value ranges from 10s to 300s. Enable alarm activation function. You need to select alarm output port so that system can activate corresponding alarm device when an alarm occurs. Latch System can delay the alarm output for specified time after an alarm ended. The value ranges from 1s to 300s. 333 Parameter Function Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function. Buzzer Check the box here to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs. Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the centre
(Including alarm centre). Send Email If you enabled this function, System can send out an email to alert you when an alarm occurs. Tour You need to click setup button to select tour channel. System begins 1-wiindow or multiple-window tour display among the channel(s) you set to record when an alarm occurs. See Figure 5-59. PTZ Activation Here you can set PTZ movement when alarm occurs. Such as go to preset X. See Figure 5-75. Snapshot Click setup button to select snapshot channel. See Figure 5-60. 5.8.3.5.2 Net Alarm The network alarm interface is shown as in Figure 5-76. Network alarm refers to the alarm signal from the network. System does not anti-dither and sensor type setup. For setup information, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.5.1. 5.8.3.5.3 IPC external alarm The IPC external alarm interface is shown as in Figure 5-77. Figure 5-76 Network alarm refers to the alarm signal from the network. System does not anti-dither and sensor type 334 setup. For setup information, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.5.1. 5.8.3.5.4 IPC Offline Alarm The IPC offline alarm interface is shown as in Figure 5-78. Figure 5-77 System can generate an alarm once the network camera is offline. For setup information, please refer to chapter 5.8.3.5.1. Figure 5-78 335 5.8.3.6 Abnormality It includes six types: No disk, disk error, disks no space, disconnect, IP conflict, MAC conflict. See Figure 5-79 through Figure 5-84. Figure 5-79 Figure 5-80 Figure 5-81 Figure 5-82 336 Figure 5-83 Figure 5-84 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Event Type The abnormal events include: No disk, disk error, disk no space, net disconnection, IP conflict and MAC conflict. You can set one or more items here. Less than: You can set the minimum percentage value here (For disk not space only). The device can alarm when capacity is not sufficient. You need to draw a circle to enable this function. Enable Check the box here to enable selected function. Alarm Out Please select corresponding alarm output channel when an alarm occurs. You need to check the box to enable this function. Latch The alarm output can delay for the specified time after an alarm stops. The value ranges from 1s to 300s. Show message System can pop up a message to alarm you in the local host screen if you enabled this function. Alarm upload System can upload the alarm signal to the centre (Including alarm centre. Send Email If you enabled this function, System can send out an email to alert you when an alarm occurs. 337 Parameter Function Buzzer Check the box here to enable this function. The buzzer beeps when an alarm occurs. 5.8.4 Storage 5.8.4.1 Schedule In this interfaces, you can add or remove the schedule record setup. See Figure 5-85. There are four record modes: general (auto), motion detect, alarm and MD&alarm. There are six periods in one day. You can view the current time period setup from the color bar. Green color stands for the general record/snapshot. Yellow color stands for the motion detect record/snapshot.. Red color stands for the alarm record/snapshot. Blue color stands for MD&alarm record/snapshot. Figure 5-85 Figure 5-86 338 Figure 5-87 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Channel Please select a channel from the dropdown list. Pre-record Please input pre-record time here. The value ranges from 0 to 30. Redundancy Check the box here to enable redundancy function. Please note this function is null if there is only one HDD. Snapshot Check the box here to enable snapshot function. Holiday Check the box here to enable holiday function. Setup Copy Click the Setup button, you can set record period. See Figure 5-86. There are six periods in one day. If you do not check the date at the bottom of the interface, current setup is for today only. Please click Save button and then exit. Copy function allows you to copy one channel setup to another. After setting in channel, click Copy button, you can go to interface Figure 5-87. You can see current channel name is grey such as channel 1. Now you can select the channel you want to paste such as channel 339 Parameter Function 5/6/7. If you want to save current setup of channel 1 to all channels, you can click the first box ALL. Click the OK button to save current copy setup. Click the OK button in the Encode interface, the copy function succeeded. 5.8.4.2 HDD Manager 5.8.4.2.1 Local Storage The local interface is shown as in Figure 5-88. Here you can see HDD information. You can also operate the read-only, read-write, redundancy (if there are more than on HDD) and format operation. 5.8.4.2.2 HDD The HDD interface is to set HDD group. See Figure 5-89. Figure 5-88 5.8.4.2.3 FTP The FTP interface is to set FTP information. See Figure 5-90. Figure 5-89 Please set the FTP as your remote storage location. System can save record file or snapshot picture to the FTP once the network is offline or malfunction. 340 5.8.4.3 Record Control The interface is shown as in Figure 5-91. Figure 5-90 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-91 Channel Here you can view channel number. The number displayed here is the max channel amount of your device. Status There are three statuses: schedule, manual and stop. Schedule System enables auto record function as you set in record schedule setup (general, motion detect and alarm). 341 Manual It has the highest priority. Enable corresponding channel to record no matter what period applied in the record setup. Stop current channel record no matter what period applied in the record setup. Check the corresponding All button, you can enable or disable all channels record. Stop Start all/
stop all 5.8.4.4 RAID Manager Important Please make sure your purchased product support the RAID function, otherwise you can not see the following interface. 5.8.4.4.1 RAID Config It is for you to manage RAID HDD. It can display RAID name, type, free space, total space, status and etc. Here you can add/delete RAID HDD. Click Add button to select RAID type and then select HDDs, click OK button to add. See Figure 5-92. Figure 5-92 5.8.4.4.2 Hotspare disks In Figure 5-92, click hotspare button, you can add the hot spare HDD. See Figure 5-93. The type includes two options:
Global: It is global hotspare disk. When any RAID becomes degrading, it can replace and build the RAID. Local: It is local hotspare disk. When the specified RAID becomes degrading, it can replace and build the RAID. Select a hot spare device and then click Delete button. Click Apply button to delete. 342 Figure 5-93 5.8.4.5 Storage 5.8.4.5.1 Main Stream The main stream interface is shown as in Figure 5-94. Here you can set corresponding HDD group to save main stream. Figure 5-94 5.8.4.5.2 Sub Stream The sub stream interface is shown as in Figure 5-95. Here you can set corresponding HDD group to save sub stream. 343 Figure 5-95 5.8.4.5.3 Snapshot The snapshot interface is shown as in Figure 5-96. Here you can set corresponding HDD group to save snapshot picture. Figure 5-96 5.8.5 Setting 5.8.5.1 General The general interface includes general, date/time and holiday setup. 5.8.5.1.1 General The general interface is shown as in Figure 5-97. Figure 5-97 344 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Device ID It is to set device name. Device No. It is device channel number. Language You can select the language from the dropdown list. Please note the device needs to reboot to get the modification activated. Video Standard HDD full Pack duration This is to display video standard such as PAL. Here is for you to select working mode when hard disk is full. There are two options: stop recording or rewrite. If current working HDD is overwritten or the current HDD is full while the next HDD is no empty, then system stops recording, If the current HDD is full and then next HDD is not empty, then system overwrites the previous files. Here is for you to specify record duration. The value ranges from 1 to 120 minutes. Default value is 60 minutes. 5.8.5.1.2 Date and time The date and time interface is shown as in Figure 5-98 Figure 5-98 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Date format Here you can select date format from the dropdown list. 345 There are two options: 24-H and 12-H. Time Format Time zone The time zone of the device. It is to set system time. It becomes valid after you set. System time Sync PC DST You can click this button to save the system time as your PC current time. Here you can set day night save time begin time and end time. You can set according to the date format or according to the week format. NTP You can check the box to enable NTP function. NTP server You can set the time server address. Port Interval It is to set the time server port. It is to set the sync periods between the device and the time server. 5.8.5.1.3 Holiday Setup Holiday setup interface is shown as in Figure 5-99. Here you can click Add holidays box to add a new holiday and then click Save button to save. Figure 5-99 5.8.5.2 Account Note:
For the character in the following user name or the user group name, system max supports 6-digits. The space in the front or at the end of the string is null. The valid string includes: character, number, and underline. The user amount default setup is 64 and the group amount default setup is 20. The factory default setup includes two levels: user and admin. You can set the corresponding group and then set the rights for the respective user in the specified groups. User management adopts group/user modes. The user name and the group name shall be unique. One user shall be included in only one group. 346 5.8.5.2.1 User name In this interface you can add/remove user and modify user name. See Figure 5-100. Figure 5-100 Add user: It is to add a name to group and set the user rights. See Figure 5-101. There are three default users: admin/888888 and hidden user default. Hidden user default is for system interior use only and can not be deleted. When there is no login user, hidden user default automatically login. You can set some rights such as monitor for this user so that you can view some channel view without login. Here you can input the user name and password and then select one group for current user. Please note the user rights shall not exceed the group right setup. For convenient setup, please make sure the general user has the lower rights setup than the admin. Figure 5-101 347 Modify user It is to modify the user property, belonging group, password and rights. See Figure 5-102. Modify password It is to modify the user password. You need to input the old password and then input the new password twice to confirm the new setup. Please click the OK button to save. Please note, the password ranges from 1-digit to 6-digit. It shall include the number only. For the user of the account rights, he can modify the password of other users. Figure 5-102 5.8.5.2.2 Group The group management interface can add/remove group, modify group password and etc. The interface is shown as in Figure 5-103. Figure 5-103 348 Add group: It is to add group and set its corresponding rights. See Figure 5-104. Please input the group name and then check the box to select the corresponding rights. It includes:
shutdown/reboot device, live view, record control, PTZ control and etc. Figure 5-104 Modify group Click the modify group button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 5-105. Here you can modify group information such as remarks and rights. Figure 5-105 349 5.8.5.3 Display Display interface includes GUI, TV adjust, Tour and zero-channel encoding. 5.8.5.3.1 Display Here you can set background color and transparency level. See Figure 5-106. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Figure 5-106 Resolution There are four options: 19201080, 12801024(default), 1280720, 1024768. Please note the system needs to reboot to activate current setup. Color mode Please select from the dropdown list. Transparency Here is for you to adjust transparency. The value ranges from 128 to 255. Time Check the box here, you can view system time and channel title/channel number on the monitor video. title Image Check the box; you can optimize the margin of the preview video. enhance Startup wizard Once you check the box here, system will go to the startup wizard directly when the system restarts the next time. Otherwise, it will go to the login interface. Navigation Check the box here, system displays the navigation bar on the bar interface. 350 Original scale Click the Set button to select a channel, it can restore original scale. Auto logout Here is for you to set auto logout interval once login user remains inactive for a specified time. Value ranges from 0 to 60 minutes. 0 means there is no standby time. After the auto logout, the user needs to input user name and password to login again. Display Check the box to enable IVS function, system can display IVS rule intelligent on the preview interface. rule(s) 5.8.5.3.2 Tour The tour interface is shown as in Figure 5-107. Here you can set tour interval, split mode, motion detect tour and alarm tour mode. Figure 5-107 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Enable tour Check the box here to enable tour function. Interval Split Motion tour/Alarm tour 5.8.5.4 Alarm Out Here is for you to adjust transparency. The value ranges from 5 to 120s. The default setup is 5s. Here you can set window mode and channel group. System can support 1/4/8/9/16/25/36-window according to device channel amount. Here you can set motion detect tour/alarm tour window mode. System supports 1/8-window now. 351 The alarm output interface is shown as below. See Figure 5-108 Here you can set alarm output mode: auto/manual/stop. Figure 5-108 5.8.5.5 Default The default setup interface is shown as in Figure 5-109. Here you can select Network/Event/Storage/Setting/Camera. Or you can check the All box to select all items. Figure 5-109 5.8.5.6 Import/Export The interface is shown as in Figure 5-110. This interface is for you to export or import the configuration files. 352 Figure 5-110 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Browse Click to select import file. Import Export 5.8.5.7 Auto maintain It is to import the local setup files to the system. It is to export the corresponding WEB setup to your local PC. The auto maintain interface is shown as in Figure 5-111. Here you can select auto reboot and auto delete old files interval from the dropdown list. If you want to use the auto delete old files function, you need to set the file period. Click Manual reboot button, you can restart device manually. Figure 5-111 5.8.5.8 Upgrade The upgrade interface is shown as in Figure 5-112. Please select the upgrade file and then click the update button to begin update. Please note the file name shall be as *.bin. During the upgrade process, do not unplug the power cable, network cable, or shutdown the device. Important Improper upgrade program may result in device malfunction! Please make sure the operation is operated under the supervision of the professional engineer!
353 5.8.5.9 RS232 Figure 5-112 The RS232 interface is shown as in Figure 5-113. Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 5-113 Parameter Function Protocol Select the corresponding dome protocol. Default setup is console. Baud Rate Select the baud rate. Default setup is 115200. Data Bit The value ranges from 5 to 8. Default setup is 8. Stop bit There are two options: 1/2. Default setup is 1. Parity There are five options: none/odd/even/space/mark. Default setup is none. 5.8.5.10 PTZ The PTZ interface is shown as in Figure 5-114 (Local) and Figure 5-115 (Remote). Before setup, please check the following connections are right:
PTZ and decoder connection is right. Decoder address setup is right. Decoder A (B) line connects with NVR A (B) line. Click Save button after you complete setup, you can go back to the monitor interface to control speed dome. 354 Figure 5-114 Figure 5-115 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Parameter Function Channel Select speed dome connected channel. PTZ Type There are two options: local/remote. Please select remote type if you are connecting to the network PTZ. Please select local type if you are using RS485 to the PTZ camera. Select the corresponding dome protocol such as PELCOD. Set corresponding dome address. Default value is 1. Please note your setup here shall comply with your dome address; otherwise you can not control the speed dome. Select the dome baud rate. Default setup is 9600. Protocol Address Baud Rate Data Bit The value ranges from 5 to 8. Default setup is 8. Please set according to the speed dome dial switch setup. 355 Parameter Function Stop bit The value ranges from 1 to 2. Default setup is 1. Please set according to the speed dome dial switch setup. Parity The options include non/odd/even/space/null. Default setup is none. Please set according to the speed dome dial switch setup. 5.9 Information 5.9.1 Version The version interface is shown as in Figure 5-116. Here you can view record channel, alarm input/output information, software version, release date and etc. Please note the following information is for reference only. Figure 5-116 5.9.2 Log Here you can view system log. See Figure 5-117. Figure 5-117 356 Please refer to the following sheet for log parameter information. Parameter Function Type Log types include: system operation, configuration operation, data operation, event operation, record operation, user management, log clear. Start time Set the start time of the requested log. End time Search Detailed information Clear Set the end time of the requested log. You can select log type from the drop down list and then click search button to view the list. You can click the stop button to terminate current search operation. You can select one item to view the detailed information. You can click this button to delete all displayed log files. Please note system does not support clear by type. Backup You can click this button to backup log files to current PC. 5.9.3 Online User The online user interface is shown as in Figure 5-118. Figure 5-118 5.10 Playback Click Playback button, you can see an interface is shown as in Figure 5-119. 357 Figure 5-119 5.10.1 Search Record Please set record type, record date, window display mode and channel name. Select Date You can click the date on the right pane to select the date. The green highlighted date is system current date and the blue highlighted date means it has record files. Window Split Select window split mode. Click to display in full screen. Click ESC button to exit. See Figure 5-120. Figure 5-120 Select Channel 14 means main stream and A1A4 means sub stream. Select Record Type Check the corresponding box to select record type. See Figure 5-121. Figure 5-121 5.10.2 File List Click File list button, you can see the corresponding files in the list. See Figure 5-122. 358 Figure 5-122 5.10.3 Playback Select a file you want to play and then click Play button, system can begin playback. You can select to playback in full-screen. Please note for one channel, system can not playback and download at the same time. You can use the playback control bar to implement various operations such as play, pause, stop, slow play, fast play and etc. See Figure 5-123. Figure 5-123 359 5.10.4 Download Select the file(s) you want to download and then click download button, you can see an interface shown as in Figure 5-124. The Download button becomes Stop button and there is a process bar for your reference. Please go to you default file saved path to view the files. Figure 5-124 5.10.5 Load more It is for you to search record or picture. You can select record channel, record type and record time to download. Or you can use watermark function to verify file. 5.10.5.1 Download By File Select channel, record type, bit stream type and then input start time and end time. Click Search button, the download by file interface is shown as in Figure 5-125. Figure 5-125 360 Check the file(s) you want to download and there are two options for you to save the file(s). Download to local Click Download to local, system pops up the following interface for you to set record format and saved path. See Figure 5-126. Figure 5-126 You can click OK to download and view the download process. After the download operation, you can see corresponding dialog box. Download to USB Connect the corresponding p peripheral device, and then click Download to USB button, you can see the following interface. See Figure 5-127. Figure 5-127 Select Backup device and backup type first and then click Start backup button. After the download operation, you can see corresponding dialogue box. 5.10.5.2 Download by Time Select channel, bit stream type, start time and end time. Click Download to Local button, you can see download by time interface is shown as in Figure 5-128. 361 Figure 5-128 Set record format and saved path, you can click OK to download and view the download process. After the download operation, you can see corresponding dialog box. 5.10.5.3 Watermark Watermark interface is shown as In Figure 5-129. Please select a file and then click Verify button to see the file has been tampered with or not Figure 5-129 5.11 Alarm Click alarm function, you can see an interface is shown as Figure 5-130. Here you can set device alarm type and alarm sound setup (Please make sure you have enabled audio function of corresponding alarm events.). 362 Please refer to the following sheet for detailed information. Figure 5-130 Type Alarm Type Parameter Function Video loss System alarms when video loss occurs. Motion detection System alarms when motion detection alarm occurs. Tampering System alarms when camera is viciously masking. Disk full System alarms when disk is full. Disk error System alarms when disk error occurs. External alarm Alarm input device sends out alarm. IPC external It refers to the on-off signal from the network alarm camera. It can activate the NVR local activation operation. IPC offline alarm System can generate an alarm when the network camera and the NVR are disconnected. Intelligent detect System alarms when IVS alarm occurs. Audio detect System alarms when audio detect is abnormal. Operation Prompt Check the box here, system can automatically pops up an alarm icon on the Alarm button in the main interface when there is an alarm. Alarm Play alarm System sends out alarm sound when an alarm Sound sound occurs. You can specify as you wish. Sound path Here you can specify alarm sound file. 5.12 Log out Click log out button, system goes back to log in interface. See Figure 5-131. You need to input user name and password to login again. 363 Figure 5-131 5.13 Un-install Web Control You can use web un-install tool uninstall web.bat to un-install web control. Please note, before you un-installation, please close all web pages, otherwise the un-installation might result in error 364 6 Glossary DHCP: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol. It is one of the TCP/IP protocol cluster. It is principally used to assign temporary IP addresses to computers on a network. DDNS: DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name Server) is a service that maps Internet domain names to IP addresses. This service is useful to anyone who wants to operate a server (web server, mail server, ftp server and etc) connected to the internet with a dynamic IP or to someone who wants to connect to an office computer or server from a remote location with software. eSATA: eSATA(External Serial AT) is an interface that provides fast data transfer for external storage devices. It is the extension specifications of a SATA interface. GPS: GPS (Global Positioning System) is a satellite system, protected by the US military, safely orbiting thousands of kilometers above the earth. PPPoE: PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) is a specification for connecting multiple computer users on an Ethernet local area network to a remote site. Now the popular mode is ADSL and it adopts PPPoE protocol. WIFI: Wi-Fi is the name of a popular wireless networking technology that uses radio waves to provide wireless high-speed Internet and network connections. The standard is for wireless local area networks (WLANs). It is like a common language that all the devices use to communicate to each other. It is actually IEEE802.11, a family of standard The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.) 3G: 3G is the wireless network standard. It is called 3G because it is the third generation of cellular telecom standards. 3G is a faster network for phone and data transmission and speed Is over several hundred kbps. Now there are four standards: CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and WiMAX. Dual-stream: The dual-stream technology adopts high-rate bit stream for local HD storage such as QCIF/CIF/2CIF/DCIF/4CIF encode and one low-rate bit stream for network transmission such as QCIF/CIF encode. It can balance the local storage and remote network transmission. The dual-stream can meet the difference band width requirements of the local transmission and the remote transmission. In this way, the local transmission using high-bit stream can achieve HD storage and the network transmission adopting low bit stream suitable for the fluency requirements of the 3G network such as WCDMA, EVDO, TD-SCDMA.. On-off value: It is the non-consecutive signal sampling and output. It includes remote sampling and remote output. It has two statuses: 1/0. 365 7 FAQ Questions Solutions NVR can not boot up Input power is not correct. properly. Power connection is not correct. Power switch button is damaged. Program upgrade is wrong. HDD malfunction or something wrong with HDD ribbon. Seagate DB35.1, DB35.2SV35 or Maxtor 17-g has compatibility problem. Please upgrade to the latest version to solve this problem. Front panel error. Main board is damaged. NVR often automatically shuts down or stops running. Input voltage is not stable or it is too low. HDD malfunction or something wrong with the ribbon. Button power is not enough. Front video signal is not stable. Working environment is too harsh, too much dust. System can not detect hard disk. Hardware malfunction. HDD is broken. HDD ribbon is damaged. HDD cable connection is loose. Main board SATA port is broken. There is no video output Program is not compatible. Please upgrade to the latest version. whether it is one-channel, Brightness is 0. Please restore factory default setup. multiple-channel or all-channel output. Check your screen saver. NVR hardware malfunctions. I can not search local HDD is broken. HDD ribbon is damaged. records. Upgraded program is not compatible. The recorded file has been overwritten. Record function has been disabled. Video quality setup is too low. Video is distorted when searching local records. Time display is not correct. Program read error, bit data is too small. There is mosaic in the full screen. Please restart the NVR to solve this problem. HDD data ribbon error. HDD malfunction. NVR hardware malfunctions. Setup is not correct Battery contact is not correct or voltage is too low. Crystal is broken. 366 Questions Solutions NVR can not control PTZ. I can not log in client-end or web. Front panel PTZ error PTZ decoder setup, connection or installation is not correct. Cable connection is not correct. PTZ setup is not correct. PTZ decoder and NVR protocol is not compatible. PTZ decoder and NVR address is not compatible. When there are several decoders, please add 120 Ohm between the PTZ decoder A/B cables furthest end to delete the reverberation or impedance matching. Otherwise the PTZ control is not stable. The distance is too far. For Windows 98 or Windows ME user, please update your system to Windows 2000 sp4. Or you can install client-end software of lower version. Please note right now, our NVR is not compatible with Windows VISTA control. ActiveX control has been disabled. No dx8.1 or higher. Please upgrade display card driver. Network connection error. Network setup error. Password or user name is invalid. Client-end is not compatible with NVR program. There is only mosaic no video when preview or playback video file remotely. Network fluency is not good. Client-end resources are limit. Current user has no right to monitor. Network is not stable. Network connection is IP address conflict. not stable. MAC address conflict. PC or device network card is not good. Burner and NVR are in the same data cable. System uses too much CPU resources. Please stop record first Burn error /USB back and then begin backup. error. Keyboard can not control NVR. Data amount exceeds backup device capacity. It may result in burner error. Backup device is not compatible. Backup device is damaged. NVR serial port setup is not correct Address is not correct When there are several switchers, power supply is not enough. Transmission distance is too far. 367 Questions Solutions Alarm signal can not been Alarm output has been open manually. Alarm setup is not correct. disarmed. Input device error or connection is not correct. Some program versions may have this problem. Please upgrade your system. Alarm setup is not correct. Alarm function is null. Alarm cable connection is not correct. Alarm input signal is not correct. There are two loops connect to one alarm device. Camera quality is too low. Lens is dirty. Camera is installed against Record storage period is the light. Camera aperture setup is not correct. not enough. HDD capacity is not enough. HDD is damaged. There is no media player. No DXB8.1 or higher graphic acceleration software. Can not playback the There is no DivX503Bundle.exe control when you play the file downloaded file. transformed to AVI via media player. No DivX503Bundle.exe or ffdshow-2004 1012 .exe in Windows XP OS. Forgot local menu operation password or network password There is no video. The screen is in black. The displayed video is not full in the monitor. Please contact your local service engineer or our sales person for help. We can guide you to solve this problem. IPC IP address is not right. IPC port number is not right. IPC account (user name/password) is not right. IPC is offline. Please cheek current resolution setup. If the current setup is 1920*1080, then you need to set the monitor resolution as 1920*1080. There is no HDMI output. Displayer is not in HDMI mode. HDMI cable connection is not right. The network bandwidth is not sufficient. The multiple-channel The video is not fluent monitor operation needs at least 100M or higher. when I view in Your PC resources are not sufficient. For 16-ch remote monitor multiple-channel mode operation, the PC shall have the following environment:
from the client-end. Quad Core, 2G or higher memory, independent displayer, display card memory 256M or higher. 368 Questions Solutions Please make sure the IPC has booted up. IPC network connection is right and it is online IPC IP is in the blacklist. I can not connect to the The device has connected to the too many IPC. It can not transmit IPC the video. Check the IPC port value and the time zone is the same as the NVR. Make sure current network environment is stable. After I set the NVR resolution as 1080P, my monitor can not display. Shut down the device and then reboot. When you reboot, please press the Fn button at the same time and then release after 5 seconds. You can restore NVR resolution to the default setup. Use telnet and then input the following command My admin account has cd /mnt/mtd/Config/
been changed and I can rm -rf group not log in. rm -rf password Reboot the device to restore the default password. After I login the Web , I can not find the remote Please clear the Web controls and load again. interface to add the IPC. There is IP and gateway, I can access the internet via the router. But I can not access the internet after I reboot the NVR. I use the VGA montior.I Please use command PING to check you can connect to the gateway or not. Use telnet to access and then use command ifconfig a to check device IP address. If you see the subnet mask and the gateway has changed after the reboot. Please upgrade the applications and set again. want to know if I use the For 32-channel series product, the 9/16-window is using the sub multple-window mode, I stream. see the video from the For 4/8/16 series product, system is using the main stream no main stream or the sub matter you are in what display mode. stream?
Daily Maintenance Please use the brush to clean the board, socket connector and the chassis regularly. The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio/video disturbance. Keep the device away from the static voltage or induced voltage. Please unplug the power cable before you remove the audio/video signal cable, RS232 or RS485 cable. Do not connect the TV to the local video output port (VOUT).It may result in video output circuit. Always shut down the device properly. Please use the shutdown function in the menu, or you can press the power button in the rear pane for at least three seconds to shut down the device. 369 Otherwise it may result in HDD malfunction. Please make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources. Please keep the sound ventilation. Please check and maintain the device regularly. 370 8 Appendix A HDD Capacity Calculation Calculate total capacity needed by each device according to video recording (video recording type and video file storage time). Step 1: According to Formula (1) to calculate storage capacity that is the capacity of each channel needed for each hour, unit Mbyte.
(1) In the formula:
means the bit rate, unit Kbit/s Step 2: After video time requirement is confirmed, according to Formula (2) to calculate the storage capacity
, which is storage of each channel needed unit Mbyte.
= (2) In the formula:
means the recording time for each day (hour) means number of days for which the video shall be kept Step 3: According to Formula (3) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all channels in the device during scheduled video recording.
(3) In the formula: means total number of channels in one device Step 4: According to Formula (4) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all channels in device during alarm video recording (including motion detection). a% (4) In the formulaa% means alarm occurrence rate 371 iq102436008iidqidimimiqihiDihiDTqciiTmq1cTqciiTmq1 9 Appendix B Compatible Network Camera List Please note all the models in the following list for reference only. For those products not included in the list, please contact your local retailer or technical supporting engineer for detailed information. Manufact Model Version Video Encode Audio/Vid Protocol ure AXIS P1346 5.40.9.2 P3344/P3344-
5.40.9.2 E P5512 Q1604 Q1604-E Q6034E Q6035 Q1755 M7001 M3204 P3367 5.40.3.2 5.40.9 5.40.9 5.40.9.2 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 HEAD LFP4_0 H264 130220 P5532-P HEAD LFP4_0 H264 130220 ACTi ACM-3511 A1D-220-V3.12 MPEG4
.15-AC ACM-8221 A1D-220-V3.13 MPEG4 Arecont AV1115
.16-AC 65246 AV10005DN 65197 AV2115DN AV2515DN AV2815 AV5115DN 65246 65199 65197 65246 AV8185DN 65197 NBN-921-P NBC-455-12P Bosch VG5-825 NBN-832 VEZ-211-IWT EIVA NBC-255-P VIP-X1XF Brikcom B0100 D100 GE-100-CB FB-100A FD-100A 9500453 66500500 15500152 v1.0.3.9 v1.0.3.3 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 eo ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private Private Private ONVIF ONVIF Private Private Private Private Private Private Private Private Private ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF 372 Manufact Model Version Video Encode Audio/Vid Protocol ure eo Cannon VB-M400 H264 CNB MPix2.0DIR XNETM112011 H264 1229 VIPBL1.3MIR XNETM210011 H264 VF 1229 IGC-2050F XNETM210011 H264 1229 CP PLUS CP-NC9-K 6.E.2.7776 CP-NC9W-K 6.E.2.7776 H264 H264 CP-ND10-R cp20111129AN H264 S CP-ND20-R cp20111129AN H264 S CP-NS12W-C cp20110808NS H264 R VS201 cp20111129NS H264 CP-NB20-R cp20110808BN H264 S CP-NT20VL3-
cp20110808BN H264 R S CP-NS36W-A cp20110808NS H264 R CP-ND20VL2-
cp20110808BN H264 R S CP-RNP-1820 cp20120821NS H264 A CP-RNC-TP2 cp20120821NS H264 0FL3C A CP-RNP-12D cp20120828AN H264 S CP-RNC-DV1 cp20120821NS H264 0 A CP-RNC-DP2 cp20120821NS H264 0FL2C A Dynacolor ICS-13 d20120214NS H264 ICS-20W NA222 vt20111123NSA H264 H264 MPC-IPVD-03 k20111208ANS H264 13 MPC-IPVD-03 k20111208BNS H264 13AF Honeywell HIDC-1100PT h.2.2.1824 HIDC-1100P h.2.2.1824 H264 H264 Private ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF/Private Private ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF Private Private Private Private Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF ONVIF 373 Manufact Model Version Video Encode Audio/Vid Protocol ure eo HIDC-0100P h.2.2.1824 HIDC-1300V 2.0.0.21 HICC-1300W 2.0.1.7 HICC-2300 2.0.0.21 H264 H264 H264 H264 HDZ20HDX H20130114NS H264 LG Imatek Panasonic NP240/CH LW342-FP A LNB5100 KNC-B5000 KNC-B5162 KNC-B2161 WV-NP502 WV-SP102H WV-SP105H 1.41 WV-SP302H 1.41 WV-SP306H 1.4 WV-SP508H WV-SP509H WV-SF332H WV-SW316H 1.41 1.41 WV-SW355H WV-SW352H 1.41 1.03 WV-SW152E WV-SW558H WV-SW559H WV-SP105H WV-SW155E WV-SF336H WV-SF332H WV-SF132E WV-SF135E WV-SF346H WV-SF342H WV-SC385H WV-SC386H WV-SP539 DG-SC385 1.03 1.03 1.44 1.41 1.03 1.03 1.41 1.41 1.08 1.08 1.66 1.66 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 MPEG4 MPEG4 H264 H264 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 PELCO IXSOLW 1.8.1-20110912 H264
-1.9082-A1.661 7 IDE20DN 1.7.41.9111-O3 H264
.6725 ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF ONVIF Private ONVIF Private Private Private Private Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF ONVIF Private Private 374 Manufact Model Version Video Encode Audio/Vid Protocol ure eo D5118 1.7.8.9310-A1. H264 5288 IM10C10 1.6.13.9261-O2 H264 DD4N-X DD423-X D5220
.4657 01.02.0015 01.02.0006 MPEG4 MPEG4 1.8.3-FC2-2012 H264 0614-1.9320-A 1.8035 Samsung SNB-3000P SNP-3120 H264MPEG4 2.41 1.22_110120_1 H264MPEG4 SNP-3370 1.21_110318 SNB-5000 SND-5080 2.10_111227 SNZ-5200 1.02_110512 SNP-5200 1.04_110825 SNB-7000 1.10_110819 SNB-6004 V1.0.0 Sony SNC-DH110 1.50.00 SNC-CH120 1.50.00 SNC-CH135 1.73.01 SNC-CH140 1.50.00 SNC-CH210 1.73.00 SNC-DH210 1.73.00 SNC-DH240 1.50.00 SNC-DH240-T 1.73.01 SNC-CH260 1.74.01 SNC-CH280 1.73.01 SNC-RH-124 1.73.00 SNC-RS46P 1.73.00 SNC-ER550 1.74.01 SNC-ER580 1.74.01 SNC-ER580 1.78.00 SNC-VM631 1.4.0 WV-SP306 WV-SP306 SNC-VB600 SNC-VM600 SNC-VB630 SNC-VM630 SANYO VCC-HDN400 0PC 1.61.00 1.61.00 1.5.0 1.5.0 1.5.0 1.5.0 MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264MPEG4 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264MPEG4 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 H264 Private Private Private Private Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private Private ONVIF/Private Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF/Private ONVIF ONVIF SDK ONVIF Private Private Private Private ONVIF 375 Note This manual is for reference only. Slight difference may be found in the user interface. All the designs and software here are subject to change without prior written notice. All trademarks and registered trademarks are the properties of their respective owners. If there is any uncertainty or controversy, please refer to the final explanation of us. Please visit our website or contact your local service engineer for more information. ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO.,LTD. AddressNo.1199, Bin'an Road, Binjiang District, Hangzhou, P.R. China Postcode: 310053 Tel: +86-571-87688883 Fax: +86-571-87688815 Email:overseas@dahuatech.com Website: www.dahuatech.com 376
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2016-11-16 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2016-11-16
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Zhejiang Dahua Vision Technology Co., Ltd
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0028432326
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
No.1199, Bin'an Road, Binjiang District, Hangzhou
|
||||
| 1 |
Hangzhou, N/A 310053
|
|||||
| 1 |
China
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@telefication.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
SVN
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
DHNVR41WSX
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
Y****** c****
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
0571-********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
0571-********
|
||||
| 1 |
c******@dahuatech.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Cerpass Technology Corporation
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M******** C********
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
No.66,Tangzhuang Road
|
||||
| 1 |
China
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
86-51********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
86-51********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Cerpass Technology Corporation
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M******** C******
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
No.66,Tangzhuang Road
|
||||
| 1 |
China
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
86-51********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
86-51********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 05/15/2017 | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Network Video Recorder | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | Output power listed is conducted. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has a 20/40 MHz bandwidth mode. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Cerpass Technology (SuZhou) Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M******** C******
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
86-05******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
86-05********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@cerpass.net
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.8900000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC